Table of Contents
- Contents
- Safety information
- Learning about the printer
- Understanding the printer control panel
- Setting up and using the home screen applications
- Additional printer setup
- Installing internal options
- Installing hardware options
- Attaching cables
- Setting up the printer software
- Networking
- Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
- Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
- Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
- Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup
- Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
- Changing port settings after installing an internal solutions port
- Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
- Verifying printer setup
- Loading paper and specialty media
- Paper and specialty media guide
- Printing
- Copying
- Making copies
- Creating a copy shortcut
- Customizing copy settings
- Copying to a different size
- Making copies using paper from a selected tray
- Copying different paper sizes
- Copying on both sides of the paper (two-sided)
- Reducing or enlarging copies
- Adjusting copy quality
- Collating copies
- Placing separator sheets between copies
- Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
- Creating a custom copy job
- Placing a header or footer on pages
- Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
- Understanding the copy options
- E-mailing
- Faxing
- Setting up the printer to fax
- Sending a fax
- Sending a fax at a scheduled time
- Creating shortcuts
- Customizing fax settings
- Canceling a fax job
- Holding and forwarding faxes
- Understanding the fax options
- Scanning
- Understanding the printer menus
- Saving money and the environment
- Securing the printer
- Maintaining the printer
- Managing the printer
- Clearing jams
- Avoiding jams
- Understanding jam messages and locations
- [x]-page jam, clear jammed paper from multipurpose feeder. [200.xx]
- [x]-page jam, open door C and clear all jammed paper. [2yy.xx]
- [x]-page jam, slide the 3000-sheet tray and open door C. [2yy.xx]
- [x]-page jam, open door D and clear all jammed paper. [24y.xx]
- [x]-page jam, slide the 3000-sheet tray and open door D. [24y.xx]
- [x]-page jam, slide the 3000-sheet tray and open door F. [24y.xx]
- [x]-page jam, open doors G, H, and J and clear jammed paper. Leave paper in bin. [4yy.xx]
- [x]-page jam, press latch to access area G. Leave paper in bin. [40y.xx]
- [x]-page jam, press latch to access area G and clear jammed staples. Leave paper in bin. [402.93]
- [x]-page jam, open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave paper in bin. [426.xx–428.xx]
- [x]-page jam, press latch at area E to open ADF’s top cover. [28y.xx]
- Troubleshooting
- Understanding the printer messages
- Cartridge low [88.xy]
- Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
- Cartridge very low [88.xy]
- Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
- Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
- Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
- Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
- Close door [x]
- Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
- Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
- Defective flash detected [51]
- Disk full [62]
- Disk full, scan job canceled
- Disk must be formatted for use in this device
- Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
- Empty the hole punch box
- Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
- Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
- Fax memory full
- Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
- Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
- Insert hole punch box
- Insert Tray [x]
- Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
- Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
- Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
- Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
- Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
- Insufficient space between paper stacks in Tray 3
- Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
- Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
- Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
- Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
- Load Multipurpose Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
- Load Multipurpose Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
- Load Multipurpose Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
- Load Multipurpose Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
- Load staples
- Load staples [G11, G12]
- [x] maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
- Memory full [38]
- Memory full, cannot print faxes
- Memory full, cannot send faxes
- No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
- Network [x] software error [54]
- Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
- Open door H and remove paper from beneath area H10
- Paper changes needed
- Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
- Photoconductor low [84.xy]
- Photoconductor very low [84.xy]
- Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
- Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
- Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor [31.xy]
- Remove defective disk [61]
- Remove packaging material, [area name]
- Remove packaging material, open door C, remove metal clips, remove all screws from scanner carriage
- Remove paper from all bins
- Remove paper from bin [x]
- Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
- Remove paper from standard output bin
- Replace all originals if restarting job.
- Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
- Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
- Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
- Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
- Replace missing photoconductor [31.xy]
- Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]
- Replace missing cartridge [31.xy]
- Replace paper pick rollers in [paper source], use parts and instructions in tray 1 or tray 2 compart ...
- Replace photoconductor, 0 pages remain [84.xy]
- Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
- Replace unsupported photoconductor [32.xy]
- Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]
- Restore held jobs?
- Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
- Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
- Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
- Scanner maintenance required, use ADF Kit [80]
- Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
- Serial port [x] disabled [56]
- Some held jobs were not restored
- SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Standard network software error [54]
- Standard USB port disabled [56]
- Supply needed to complete job
- The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled or provide unexpected results.
- Too many flash options installed [58]
- Too many trays attached [58]
- Tray [x] paper size unsupported
- Unformatted flash detected [53]
- Unsupported disk
- Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
- Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]
- Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Solving printer problems
- Solving print problems
- Printing problems
- Confidential and other held jobs do not print
- Envelope seals when printing
- Error message about reading the flash drive appears
- Incorrect characters print
- Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
- Large jobs do not collate
- Multiple-language PDF files do not print
- Print job takes longer than expected
- Print jobs do not print
- Tray linking does not work
- Unexpected page breaks occur
- Print quality problems
- Characters have jagged or uneven edges
- Clipped pages or images
- Gray background on prints
- Horizontal voids appear on prints
- Incorrect margins on prints
- Paper curl
- Printer is printing blank pages
- Printer is printing solid black pages
- Print irregularities
- Print is too dark
- Print is too light
- Repeating defects appear on prints
- Shadow images appear on prints
- Skewed print
- Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
- Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
- Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
- Toner rubs off
- Toner specks appear on prints
- Transparency print quality is poor
- Uneven print density
- Vertical voids appear on prints
- Printing problems
- Solving copy problems
- Solving fax problems
- Solving scanner problems
- Solving home screen application problems
- Embedded Web Server does not open
- Contacting customer support
- Understanding the printer messages
- Notices
- Product information
- Edition notice
- GOVERNMENT END USERS
- Trademarks
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
- Licensing notices
- Noise emission levels
- Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
- Taiwan RoHS information 限用物質含有情況標示
- India E-Waste notice
- Product disposal
- Static sensitivity notice
- ENERGY STAR
- Temperature information
- Laser notice
- Laser advisory label
- Power consumption
- Japanese VCCI notice
- European Community (EC) directives conformity
- Radio interference notice
- Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
- Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
- Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
- Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
- Japanese telecom notice
- Notice to Users in the European Union
- Regulatory notices for wireless products
- Modular component notice
- Exposure to radio frequency radiation
- Industry Canada (Canada)
- Notice to users in the European Union
- STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUN ...
- Patent acknowledgment
- Index
Lexmark MX912dxe Gov S70 HV CAC User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for MX912dxe Gov S70 HV CAC by Lexmark which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Contents
Safety information.........................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer.............................................................................................................9
Connecting the printer to an outlet............................................................................................................... 10
Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................ 10
Printer configurations......................................................................................................................................... 11
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner....................................................................................13
Using the ADF and scanner glass..................................................................................................................14
Understanding the printer control panel................................................. 15
Using the control panel.................................................................................................................................... 15
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights......................................................15
Understanding the home screen................................................................................................................... 16
Using the touch-screen buttons.....................................................................................................................18
Setting up and using the home screen applications............................. 20
Finding the IP address of the printer........................................................................................................... 20
Finding the IP address of the computer......................................................................................................20
Accessing the Embedded Web Server....................................................................................................... 20
Customizing the home screen........................................................................................................................21
Understanding the dierent applications.................................................................................................... 21
Activating the home screen applications....................................................................................................22
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.............................................................................................................. 25
Exporting and importing a configuration.................................................................................................... 26
Additional printer setup............................................................................. 27
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................ 27
Installing hardware options.............................................................................................................................38
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................ 44
Setting up the printer software......................................................................................................................45
Networking..........................................................................................................................................................46
Verifying printer setup..................................................................................................................................... 50
Contents 2
Loading paper and specialty media..........................................................51
Setting the paper size and type..................................................................................................................... 51
Configuring Universal paper settings........................................................................................................... 51
Loading trays....................................................................................................................................................... 51
Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................53
Linking and unlinking trays.............................................................................................................................56
Paper and specialty media guide............................................................. 58
Using specialty media......................................................................................................................................58
Paper guidelines................................................................................................................................................60
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................63
Printing.........................................................................................................70
Printing forms and a document..................................................................................................................... 70
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device................................................................................................71
Printing confidential and other held jobs.................................................................................................... 73
Printing information pages.............................................................................................................................. 74
Canceling a print job.........................................................................................................................................75
Copying........................................................................................................ 76
Making copies.................................................................................................................................................... 76
Creating a copy shortcut..................................................................................................................................77
Customizing copy settings..............................................................................................................................78
Placing a header or footer on pages............................................................................................................ 81
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed...............................................................................81
Understanding the copy options....................................................................................................................81
E-mailing...................................................................................................... 84
Setting up the printer to e-mail......................................................................................................................84
Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 85
E-mailing a document.......................................................................................................................................85
Customizing e-mail settings........................................................................................................................... 86
Canceling an e-mail.......................................................................................................................................... 86
Understanding the e-mail options................................................................................................................ 86
Faxing...........................................................................................................89
Setting up the printer to fax............................................................................................................................89
Contents 3
Sending a fax.................................................................................................................................................... 104
Sending a fax at a scheduled time..............................................................................................................105
Creating shortcuts........................................................................................................................................... 105
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................106
Canceling a fax job..........................................................................................................................................108
Holding and forwarding faxes...................................................................................................................... 108
Understanding the fax options.....................................................................................................................109
Scanning...................................................................................................... 111
Using Scan to Network.....................................................................................................................................111
Scanning to an FTP address...........................................................................................................................111
Scanning to a computer or flash drive........................................................................................................ 113
Understanding the scan options...................................................................................................................114
Understanding the printer menus...........................................................116
Menus list............................................................................................................................................................116
Paper menu.........................................................................................................................................................117
Reports menu....................................................................................................................................................127
Network/Ports menu....................................................................................................................................... 128
Security menu.................................................................................................................................................... 141
Settings menu...................................................................................................................................................148
Saving money and the environment...................................................... 197
Saving paper and toner..................................................................................................................................197
Saving energy...................................................................................................................................................198
Recycling............................................................................................................................................................199
Securing the printer..................................................................................201
Using the security lock feature.................................................................................................................... 201
Statement of Volatility.....................................................................................................................................201
Erasing volatile memory................................................................................................................................202
Erasing non‑volatile memory.......................................................................................................................202
Erasing printer hard disk memory..............................................................................................................202
Configuring printer hard disk encryption................................................................................................. 203
Finding printer security information...........................................................................................................203
Maintaining the printer............................................................................204
Cleaning printer parts....................................................................................................................................204
Contents 4
Checking the status of parts and supplies...............................................................................................209
Estimated number of remaining pages.....................................................................................................209
Ordering supplies............................................................................................................................................ 210
Ordering a 300K maintenance kit................................................................................................................211
Storing parts and supplies..............................................................................................................................211
Replacing supplies.......................................................................................................................................... 212
Replacing the 300K maintenance kit........................................................................................................ 224
Replacing the ADF scan pad........................................................................................................................234
Moving the printer.......................................................................................................................................... 236
Managing the printer............................................................................... 238
Checking the virtual display.........................................................................................................................238
Setting up e‑mail alerts................................................................................................................................. 238
Viewing reports............................................................................................................................................... 238
Copying printer settings to other printers................................................................................................239
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server...................................................239
Restoring factory default settings...............................................................................................................240
Clearing jams.............................................................................................241
Avoiding jams....................................................................................................................................................241
Understanding jam messages and locations.......................................................................................... 242
[x]‑page jam, clear jammed paper from multipurpose feeder. [200.xx]............................................244
[x]‑page jam, open door C and clear all jammed paper. [2yy.xx]........................................................244
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door C. [2yy.xx].................................................. 246
[x]‑page jam, open door D and clear all jammed paper. [24y.xx].......................................................249
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door D. [24y.xx]..................................................250
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door F. [24y.xx]....................................................251
[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H, and J and clear jammed paper. Leave paper in bin. [4yy.xx]....254
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G. Leave paper in bin. [40y.xx].........................................257
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G and clear jammed staples. Leave paper in
bin. [402.93].................................................................................................................................................260
[x]‑page jam, open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave paper in bin. [426.xx–
428.xx]...........................................................................................................................................................263
[x]‑page jam, press latch at area E to open ADF’s top cover. [28y.xx]..............................................268
Troubleshooting........................................................................................270
Understanding the printer messages........................................................................................................270
Solving printer problems.............................................................................................................................. 286
Contents 5
Solving print problems.................................................................................................................................. 293
Solving copy problems...................................................................................................................................319
Solving fax problems..................................................................................................................................... 322
Solving scanner problems............................................................................................................................329
Solving home screen application problems.............................................................................................333
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................... 333
Contacting customer support...................................................................................................................... 334
Notices....................................................................................................... 336
Product information........................................................................................................................................336
Edition notice................................................................................................................................................... 336
Power consumption........................................................................................................................................342
Index...........................................................................................................355
Contents 6
Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near
the product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types
of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance,
property damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
•Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord
provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product
to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone
system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
Safety information 7
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
This product produces ozone during normal operation, and is equipped with a filter designed to limit ozone
concentrations to levels well below the recommended exposure limits. To avoid high ozone concentration levels
during extensive usage, install this product in a well-ventilated area and replace the ozone and exhaust filters
as indicated in the product maintenance instructions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this
product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone,
during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 8
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The
guides are available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available
at http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending
on your operating system.
Learning about the printer 9
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation
for your country or region can be found on the
support Web site or on the printed warranty that came
with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the
store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have
it ready when you contact customer support so that
they may serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Connecting the printer to an outlet
Connect the power cord to the printer and then to a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
Note: The electrical outlet may look dierent depending on your country or region.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to
install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure that airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
Learning about the printer 10
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Storage temperature -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
1Rear 120 mm (4.80 in.)
2Right side 400 mm (15.70 in.)
3Front 444.5 mm (17.50 in.)
4Left side 120 mm (4.80 in.)
5Top 400 mm (15.7 0 in .)
Printer configurations
Note: Make sure to configure the printer on a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
Learning about the printer 11
Basic model
1Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2ADF tray
3ADF bin
4Control panel
5Multipurpose feeder
6Standard 2 x 500-sheet tray
7Standard bin
Configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 12
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1Staple finisher
Note: This is supported only in select printer models.
None
23000‑sheet tray None
32 x 500‑sheet tray 2500‑sheet tray
42500‑sheet tray 2 x 500‑sheet tray
5Finisher
•Staple, hole punch finisher
•Booklet finisher
None
When using optional trays:
•The 3000-sheet tray is supported only if another optional tray is installed.
•The staple finisher is not supported if another finisher is installed.
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
•Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
•Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer 13
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
•Load an original document faceup.
•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,
book pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media
(such as magazine clippings).
•Place the document facedown in the corner with the
arrow.
Learning about the printer 14
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the control panel
Use the To
1Display •View the printer status and messages.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•Touching the control panel home screen
•Opening the scanner cover
The following actions wake the printer from Hibernate mode:
•Pressing the Sleep button until the printer wakes
•Performing a power‑on reset using the main power switch
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
6Clear all / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
7Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
8Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and
indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Understanding the printer control panel 15
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the
home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu
screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touc h To
1Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary
language of the printer.
2Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP
server.
Understanding the printer control panel 16
Touc h To
6Arrows Scroll up or down.
7Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and
file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not
from any other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory
card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies •Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
•Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to
clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search Held Jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
•User name for held or confidential print jobs
•Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•Profile names
•Bookmark container or print job names
•USB container or print job names for supported file types
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows
the path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you
touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the
number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does
not become the default setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message aects a function, then this icon appears and the
red indicator light blinks.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Feature Description
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP address
Example:
123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of
the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods.
You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so
you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not
physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touc h To
1Arrows View a list of options.
2Copy It Print a copy.
3Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4Home Go to the home screen.
5Increase Select a higher value.
6Decrease Select a lower value.
7Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Understanding the printer control panel 18
Other touch-screen buttons
Touc h To
Accept Save a setting.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the printer control panel 19
Setting up and using the home screen
applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded applications.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
•The shortcuts that you created using MyShortcut can only be edited or deleted using the application. For
more information, see “Using MyShortcut” on page 24.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You ca n find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1Run the command prompt.
2Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3Look for the IP address.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings
even when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
Setting up and using the home screen applications 20
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home
screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home
screen applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Understanding the dierent applications
Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up
Card Copy” on page 23.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on
page 89.
Forms and
Favorites
Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For
more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting
up Multi Send” on page 24.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using
MyShortcut” on page 24.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing”
on page 84.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 113.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see
“Scanning to an FTP address” on page 112.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Use To
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see
“Setting up Scan to Network” on page 25.
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you
must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on
accessing the Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 20.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
•Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
•Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms
directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the
documentation that came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the
information on the card in a more convenient manner.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
•Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
•Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the
application is used.
•Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy
of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast
automatically.
•Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full
size).
•Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
–When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and
400 dpi for black and white.
–When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color,
and 300 dpi for black and white.
•Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax,
or e-mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the
destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified
destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
•The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where
the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer
at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating
system.
•The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do either of the following:
•Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
•Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP
address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on
the printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near
the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create
bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other
printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Export or import a configuration file for one or multiple applications.
For one application
aNavigate to:
Settings > Apps > Apps Management > select an application > Configure
bExport or import the configuration file.
Notes:
•If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file
is saved.
•If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click
Apply.
For multiple applications
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bExport or import a configuration file.
Note: When importing a configuration file, click Submit to complete the process.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
•Memory card
–DDR2 DIMM
–Flash memory
•Fonts
•Firmware cards
–Forms and Bar Code
–PRESCRIBE
–IPDS
•LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–Standard 10/100/1000 Ethernet
–MarkNetTM N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless print server
–MarkNet N8352 802.11 b/g/n wireless print server
Accessing the controller board
Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 27
1Remove the connector cover.
2Remove the screws from the controller board access cover.
3Remove the access cover.
4Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector:
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 28
1Option card connector
2Memory card connector
3Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
5Align the base of the access cover to the printer.
Additional printer setup 29
6Reattach the access cover.
7Tighten the screws on the access cover.
8Reattach the connector cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
3Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
Additional printer setup 30
4Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall
until it clicks into place.
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
Additional printer setup 31
4Push the card firmly into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush with the controller board.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP). Install an ISP for additional
connectivity options.
Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
Additional printer setup 32
1Unpack the ISP kit.
1ISP
2Plastic mounting bracket
3Thumbscrews
2Access the controller board. For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
3Remove the printer hard disk.
Note: The hard disk must be removed before installing an ISP.
aUnplug the hard disk interface cable from the controller board.
Additional printer setup 33
bRemove the screws that secure the hard disk.
cRemove the hard disk.
4Install the ISP in the same location where the hard disk was located on the controller board.
aAlign the posts of the plastic mounting bracket with the holes on the controller board cage, and then
press the bracket on the cage until it clicks into place.
Additional printer setup 34
bInstall the ISP on the bracket.
cUse the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the ISP to the bracket.
5Secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board cage using the screws.
6Remove the thumbscrews that attach the hard disk mounting bracket to the hard disk, and then remove the
bracket.
Additional printer setup 35
7Align the standos of the hard disk with the holes on the ISP, and then press the hard disk down until the
standos click into place.
8Insert the plug of the hard disk interface cable into the connector on the ISP, and then connect the ISP
solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
Additional printer setup 36
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2Unplug the hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the hard disk.
To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before
pulling out the cable.
3Remove the screws holding the hard disk in place.
Additional printer setup 37
4Remove the hard disk.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:
•Optional 2 x 500‑ or 2500‑sheet tray
•Printer
•Staple finisher
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.
•Staple, hole punch finisher or booklet finisher
•Optional 3000‑sheet tray
Note: The staple finisher is not supported if another finisher is installed. For more information on installing
the finishers and optional trays, see the instruction sheet that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
Notes:
•For information on installing the optional 3000-sheet tray, see the instruction sheet that came with the
option.
•Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
Additional printer setup 38
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
The optional trays come with the following accessories:
Accessory name Quantity
Stabilizing feet 2
Locking clip 3
Metal bracket 1
Additional printer setup 39
Accessory name Quantity
Screw 5
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the printer.
3Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
4Attach the stabilizing feet to the optional tray.
Note: Make sure the feet click into place.
Additional printer setup 40
5Remove the connector cover from the printer.
6Lift the printer using the handles at the sides.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Additional printer setup 41
7Align the printer with the tray, and then lower the printer into place.
8Remove the tape from the connectors, and then plug the connectors into the receptacles of the printer.
9Open Tray 2 and Tray 3.
Additional printer setup 42
10 Secure the tray to the printer using the locking clips and the metal bracket.
•Back
•Front
11 Reinstall the connector cover.
12 Connect the power cord to the printer and electrical outlet.
Additional printer setup 43
13 Turn on the printer.
14 Set the printer software to recognize the optional tray. For more information, see “Adding available options
in the print driver” on page 45.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this
product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone,
during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Use the To
1EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the
printer and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated
fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your
country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
2LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall
jack (RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you
to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
Additional printer setup 44
Use the To
3Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4Internal Solutions Port (ISP) or
printer hard disk slot
Note: If the printer has support
for wireless connection, then
the wireless antenna is
attached here.
Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.
5Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.
6USB ports Attach a keyboard.
7USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the
area shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
2Select the printer you want to update, and then do the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
3Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3Apply the changes.
Additional printer setup 45
Networking
Notes:
•Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless
network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with
the adapter.
•A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP),
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you
begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing
the printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can
choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer
can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems
caused by a damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if
you are not sure which channel to select.
Additional printer setup 46
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the
key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must
be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate
on the network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless
utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID
or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access
point, or contact your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation
that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or
consult your system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn o the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2Select a wireless connection setup.
Additional printer setup 47
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
•The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push Button Method
2Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method
2Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access
point.
5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Additional printer setup 48
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web
Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network
mode, and channel.
4Click Submit.
5Turn o the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
6To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Changing port settings after installing an internal solutions port
Notes:
•If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the configuration.
•If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address, then do not change
the configuration.
•If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet
connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
2From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3Configure the port from the list.
4Update the IP address.
5Apply the changes.
Additional printer setup 49
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2Type the IP address in the address field.
3Apply the changes.
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
1Set the parameters in the printer.
aFrom the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
cApply the changes.
2From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Notes:
•Serial printing reduces printing speed.
•Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.
Verifying printer setup
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 50
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can aect how reliably documents print. For more
information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 241 and “Storing paper” on page 63.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size setting is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset
in the printer menus.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup
2Select a unit of measure, and then set the portrait width and height.
3Apply the changes.
Loading trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may
cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 51
2Squeeze and slide the paper guides to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
Note: Use the indicators on the bottom of the tray to position the guides.
3Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
Loading paper and specialty media 52
4Load the paper stack with the printable side faceup.
Notes:
•Load printable side facedown for duplex printing.
•Load pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front or the left side of the tray.
•Load letterhead with the header on the left side of the tray.
•Make sure that the paper is below the maximum fill line on the edge of the paper tray. Overfilling may
cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
6From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Open the multipurpose feeder.
Loading paper and specialty media 53
2Adjust the guide to match the size of the paper you are loading.
3Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper.
•Load only one size and type of paper.
Loading letterhead
Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher
One‑sided printing
Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead
facedown with the header on the left side of the
feeder.
One‑sided printing
Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead
facedown with the header on the right side of the
feeder.
Loading paper and specialty media 54
Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher
Two‑sided printing
Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead
faceup with the header on the right side of the
feeder.
Two‑sided printing
Note: For long-edge orientation, load letterhead
faceup with the header on the left side of the
feeder.
Loading prepunched paper
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
•Load envelopes with the flap side up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Loading paper and specialty media 55
•Make sure that the paper is below the maximum fill line. Overfilling may cause paper jams.
5From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the feeder.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 51.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Type a custom paper type name, and then apply the changes.
3Tou ch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Loading paper and specialty media 56
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Tou ch Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 57
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel.
•Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content,
thickness, and texture, can significantly aect print quality.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
card stock loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly aect the print quality and cause jams or other paper
feed problems.
•Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges
on a level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist.
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–Have an interlocking design.
–Have postage stamps attached.
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 58
–Have bent corners.
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal
envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
labels loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
•Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel o during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial
sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner
cartridge warranties.
•Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using letterhead
•Use letterhead specifically for laser printers.
•Print samples before buying large quantities.
•Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets.
•When printing on letterhead, take note of the page orientation.
Source Printing Side with the
letterhead
Paper orientation
Trays One‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the
back of the tray.
Two‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the
front of the tray.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet with the
top edge on the left side.
Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet with the
top edge on the right
side.
Paper and specialty media guide 59
Tips on using transparencies
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an
interval of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in
the bin. You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics aect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on
them:
Weight
The printer trays can feed paper weights between 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) grain long paper. The multipurpose
feeder can feed paper weights between 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2
(16 lb) might not be sti enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–169 g/m2 (16–45‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly aects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper
is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 200
Sheeld points.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper aects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing.
Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very dierent from the printer
environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guide 60
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively aect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•Use grain long for 60–256‑g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an oset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
•Use inks that are not aected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet
these requirements; latex inks might not.
•Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will aect print quality.
•When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other oce papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers
that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted
with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including
the following:
•Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•Bending resistance and proper stiness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Paper and specialty media guide 61
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•Surface roughness (measured in Sheeld units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it
moves through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper aects the degree
of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally
responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as
colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However,
using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its
products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company
commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor
(up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This
is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled
paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-
equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages
purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is
maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of
printing:
1Minimize paper consumption.
2Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or the Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These
certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ
environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight
paper, or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be aected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (±
0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with
a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
Paper and specialty media guide 62
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can
be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
•Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper sizes supported by the trays and multipurpose feeder
Paper size Dimensions Standard
500‑she
et tray
(Tray 1)
Standard
500‑she
et tray
(Tray 2)
2 x 50
0‑
sheet
tray
2500‑she
et tray
3000‑she
et tray
Multipurpos
e feeder3
Two‑sided
printing
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
2 2 2
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
1 1 1 XX
A6 105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
XXXX X 1
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
XX
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
2 2
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supported only in long‑edge orientation.
3 Supports paper size without size sensing.
4 Supported only if the width is from 139.7 mm (5.5 in.) to 320 mm (12.6 in.), and the length is from 148 mm (5.83 in.)
to 458 mm (18 in.).
Note: Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296.9 mm (11.69 in.), and the
length is up to 1219.2 mm (48 in.). Set the paper size to Universal.
Paper and specialty media guide 63
Paper size Dimensions Standard
500‑she
et tray
(Tray 1)
Standard
500‑she
et tray
(Tray 2)
2 x 50
0‑
sheet
tray
2500‑she
et tray
3000‑she
et tray
Multipurpos
e feeder3
Two‑sided
printing
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
XX
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
XX
JIS B4 257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)
XX
SRA3 320 x 450 mm
(12.6 x 17.7 in.)
X1XX X 1
A3 297 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)
XX
12 x 18 305 x 457 mm
(12 x 18 in.)
X1XX X 1
11 x 17 279.4 x 431.8 mm
(11 x 17 in.)
XX
Oficio 216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
XX
Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
XX
Statement 140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
1 1 1 XX
Universal 76.2 x 76.2 mm
(3 x 3 in.) to
320 x 1219.2 mm
(12.6 x 48 in.)
XX 4
7 3/4
Envelope
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
XXXX X X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
XXXX X X
10 Envelop
e
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
XXXX X X
DL Envelop
e
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
XXXX X X
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supported only in long‑edge orientation.
3 Supports paper size without size sensing.
4 Supported only if the width is from 139.7 mm (5.5 in.) to 320 mm (12.6 in.), and the length is from 148 mm (5.83 in.)
to 458 mm (18 in.).
Note: Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296.9 mm (11.69 in.), and the
length is up to 1219.2 mm (48 in.). Set the paper size to Universal.
Paper and specialty media guide 64
Paper size Dimensions Standard
500‑she
et tray
(Tray 1)
Standard
500‑she
et tray
(Tray 2)
2 x 50
0‑
sheet
tray
2500‑she
et tray
3000‑she
et tray
Multipurpos
e feeder3
Two‑sided
printing
C5 Envelop
e
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)
XXXX X X
B5 Envelop
e
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XXXX X X
Other
Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XXXX X X
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supported only in long‑edge orientation.
3 Supports paper size without size sensing.
4 Supported only if the width is from 139.7 mm (5.5 in.) to 320 mm (12.6 in.), and the length is from 148 mm (5.83 in.)
to 458 mm (18 in.).
Note: Banner is supported in the multipurpose feeder only if the width is up to 296.9 mm (11.69 in.), and the
length is up to 1219.2 mm (48 in.). Set the paper size to Universal.
Paper sizes supported by the ADF and scanner glass
Paper size Dimensions ADF Scanner glass
Business card X 1,2
3 x 5 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) X1,2
4 x 6 101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in.) 21,2
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) 2
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) 1,2 1,2
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)
JIS B4 257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in.)
SRA3 320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in.) XX
A3 297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in.)
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supports paper size without size sensing.
Paper and specialty media guide 65
Paper size Dimensions ADF Scanner glass
12 x 18 305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in.) XX
11 x 17 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17 in.)
Oficio 216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.) 2 2
Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal 89 x 98.4 mm (3.50 x 3.87 in.) to
297 x 431.8 mm (11.69 x 17.00 in.) 2 2
7 3/4 Envelope 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.) XX
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.) XX
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.) XX
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.) XX
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in.) XX
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.) XX
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.3 in.) to 176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XX
Custom Scan Size [x] 2 2
1 Supported only in short‑edge orientation.
2 Supports paper size without size sensing.
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–256‑g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type Standard
500‑sheet
tray (Tray
1)
Standard
500‑sheet
tray (Tray
2)
2 x 500-
sheet tray
2500‑she
et tray
3000‑shee
t tray
Multipurpose
feeder
ADF Scanne
r
Plain Paper1
Card Stock1
Transparencie
s2
XX XXX
Recycled1
Glossy1
1 Paper is supported for two‑sided printing.
2 Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 60.
Paper and specialty media guide 66
Paper type Standard
500‑sheet
tray (Tray
1)
Standard
500‑sheet
tray (Tray
2)
2 x 500-
sheet tray
2500‑she
et tray
3000‑shee
t tray
Multipurpose
feeder
ADF Scanne
r
Heavy Glossy1
Labels X X X X X
Vinyl Labels X X X X X X
Bond1
Envelope X X X X X
Rough
Envelope
XX XXX
Letterhead1
Preprinted1
Colored Paper1
Light Paper1
Heavy Paper1
Rough Cotton1
Custom Type1
1 Paper is supported for two‑sided printing.
2 Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 60.
Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the finishers
The printer engine supports 60–256 g/m2 (16–68‑lb) paper weights.
Note: When a finisher is installed, the standard finisher bin becomes the default bin even for print jobs that
do not require finishing.
Supported paper sizes
Paper size Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher bin 1
Staple, hole punch
finisher bin 2
Booklet finisher
A6 3 3 XX
1 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks or staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
3 Paper is supported but the finisher does not stack, staple, or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only for 2‑hole punch.
5 Paper is supported only if the paper size is between 210 x 279.4 mm (8.27 x 11 in.) and 320 x 457.2 mm (12.6 x 18 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 67
Paper size Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher bin 1
Staple, hole punch
finisher bin 2
Booklet finisher
A5 332X
JIS B5 X
JIS B4
Executive X
Letter
A4
Legal 4
12 x 18 1 3 1
11 x 17
SRA3 1 3 1
A3
Oficio 1 3 3 X
Folio 1 3 3 X
Statement 1 3 3 X
Universal 3 1 5
1 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks or staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
3 Paper is supported but the finisher does not stack, staple, or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only for 2‑hole punch.
5 Paper is supported only if the paper size is between 210 x 279.4 mm (8.27 x 11 in.) and 320 x 457.2 mm (12.6 x 18 in.).
Supported paper types
Paper type Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher Booklet finisher
Plain Paper 5
Card Stock 2X
1 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information,
see “Tips on using transparencies” on page 60.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple it.
3 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only if the finisher punches holes or stacks the paper but does not staple it.
5 Paper is supported only if the finisher staples or folds the paper.
Paper and specialty media guide 68
Paper type Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher Booklet finisher
Transparency12 3 X
Recycled 2 5
Glossy 2 5
Heavy Glossy 2 4 X
Labels 2 3 X
Bond 5
Envelope 2 3 X
Rough Envelope 2 3 X
Letterhead 5
Preprinted 5
Colored Paper 5
Light Paper 5
Heavy Paper 2 4 X
Rough Cotton 2X
Custom Type 5
1 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information,
see “Tips on using transparencies” on page 60.
2 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple it.
3 Paper is supported only if the finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
4 Paper is supported only if the finisher punches holes or stacks the paper but does not staple it.
5 Paper is supported only if the finisher staples or folds the paper.
Paper and specialty media guide 69
Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly
printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up
Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2Apply the changes.
Printing from a computer
Note: For specialty media such as labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the
printer before sending the print job.
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2If necessary, adjust the settings.
3Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu
2Adjust the toner darkness setting, and then save the changes.
Printing 70
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you are prompted to type the file password from the control panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the
printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print
documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively
printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Printing 71
2From the control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Specify the number of copies to be printed, and then send the job for printing.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held
Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.ti or .tif
•.webp
Printing 72
Printing from a mobile device
To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you
to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically
deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Tou ch Submit.
Printing held jobs
1With a document open, select File > Print.
2Select the printer, and then do the following:
•For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
•For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3Select the print job type.
Printing 73
4If necessary, assign a user name.
5Send the print job.
6From the printer home screen, touch Held Jobs.
7Send the print job.
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry
attempts, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified
time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Tou ch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Printing 74
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
1Depending on the operating system, do either of the following:
•Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
•From the System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2Select the print job to cancel.
Printing 75
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
•Load the original document faceup.
•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
•Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.
Making copies
Copying using the ADF or scanner glass
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy
paper are the same.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Note: To make a quick copy, from the control panel, press .
Copying photos
1Place a photo on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3From the Content Source menu, select the setting that best matches the original photo.
4Tou ch > Copy It.
Copying 76
Copying on transparencies or letterhead
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3Tou ch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains the specialty media.
If you are loading the specialty media into the multipurpose feeder, then navigate to:
Multipurpose Feeder > > select the size of the specialty media > > Transparency or Letterhead
4Tou ch > Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut
Notes:
•Make sure that Copy Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > Copy Shortcuts > Display > Submit.
•To delete a copy shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > Copy Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete >
Delete now.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Copy.
2Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not
saved.
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Copying 77
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a dierent size
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3Tou ch Copy to, and then select a new size for the copy.
4Tou ch > Copy It.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3Tou ch Copy to, and then select the tray containing the paper type you want to use.
4Tou ch > Copy It.
Copying dierent paper sizes
Copying onto mixed paper sizes
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
3Tou ch Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It.
Copying onto a single paper size
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
3Tou ch Copy to > Letter > > Copy It.
The scanner identifies the dierent paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes
to fit on the paper size selected.
Copying 78
Copying on both sides of the paper (two‑sided)
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred two‑sided method
Note: For the preferred method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while the
second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-
sided original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
3Tou ch > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, touch Copy.
3From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original
document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
4Tou ch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > specify the content type of the document >
3Specify the content source of the document, and then touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print
the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
Copying 79
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets > select where you want to place the separator sheets
Note: Set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3) to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2),
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating
copies” on page 79.
3Tou ch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto
a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to O, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
•If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes
empty.
•If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
Copying 80
3Load the next document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan from automatic
feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
4If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing a header or footer on pages
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select
the type of header or footer you want
3Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
4Tou ch , and then press .
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
•Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
•To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
•To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
•Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•If the paper size setting for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are dierent, then the printer automatically adjusts
the Scale setting to accommodate the dierence.
Copying 81
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set
automatic scaling.
•When copying to a dierent paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and
“Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are
copying.
•To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a
continuous decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Punch
This setting specifies whether copy jobs will have holes punched in them.
Staple
This setting specifies whether copy jobs that contain multiple pages will be stapled.
Copying 82
Using the advanced options
•Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, one-sided or two-sided printing, and type of
binding.
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before
you copy the document.
•Create Booklet—This creates a one‑sided or two‑sided booklet.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
•Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase removes whatever
is within the area selected.
•Fold—This folds the paper in two (bifold) or three (trifold).
Note: This option appears only if a booklet finisher is installed.
•Header/Footer—This inserts Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text in the specified header
or footer location.
•Margin Shift—This increases or decreases the page margin by shifting the scanned image. Touch or
to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy is cropped.
•Oset Pages—This osets pages between copies or between jobs.
•Overlay—This creates a watermark or message that overlays each page of your copy. You can choose from
preset messages or enter a custom message.
•Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also
called N-up printing, where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages on
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages on a single page.
•Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator
sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is dierent from the paper your
copies are printed on.
Copying 83
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
•Load the original document faceup.
•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
•Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Configuring e‑mail settings
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 84
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Notes:
•Make sure that E-mail Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > E-mail Shortcuts > Display > Submit.
•To delete an e-mail shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > E‑mail Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete
> Delete Entry > Delete now.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple
addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
MyShortcut > Create > E‑mail
2Type a unique shortcut name, and then touch Done.
3Configure the e‑mail settings, and then touch Done.
4Tou ch E‑mail Shortcuts on the home screen to verify the shortcut.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the control panel
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, touch E-mail, and then enter the information needed.
3Configure and then save the output file type settings.
4Tou ch Send It.
E-mailing 85
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
3Tou ch Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
3Select the recipient’s name, and then touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Changing the output file type
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
3Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
4Tou ch > Send It.
Canceling an e-mail
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
E-mailing 86
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-
mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces
the file size.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu of
the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an
equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
•XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
E-mailing 87
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper. This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you e‑mail the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
E-mailing 88
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
•Load the original document faceup.
•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
•Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.
Setting up the printer to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this
product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone,
during a lightning storm.
Notes:
•The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
•During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up
later, and then touch Continue.
•The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 89
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top
or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the
business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending
fax machine, business, other entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for
telecommunication terminal equipment” on page 345.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded
Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax
setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax
capabilities, then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
aEnter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
bEnter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Setting up fax using a standard telephone line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 90
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
•You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer O).
•If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a specified number of rings.
Faxing 91
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for
the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes
automatically.
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 92
Connected to dierent wall jacks
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
•Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering
machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to six.
Faxing 93
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
•This setup works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax, and if you subscribe to a
distinctive ring service.
•When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the
telephone to receive the fax.
•You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically, but turn o the voice mail service when you
are expecting a fax.
Faxing 94
Setting up fax using digital subscriber line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Digital subscriber line (DSL) splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone
and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel.
Faxing 95
To minimize interference between the two channels, ask for a DSL filter from your DSL provider.
1Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
3Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone port on the DSL filter.
Note: To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the telephone port of
the printer, and then connect the telephone.
Setting up fax using VoIP telephone service
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Faxing 96
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge extra
cost for the activation of the second telephone port.
3Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
•To check if the telephone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the port, and
then listen for a dial tone.
•If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay extra cost, then use a phone
splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the
printer and telephone into the splitter.
•To check the splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter, and then listen for a dial tone.
Faxing 97
Setting up fax using cable modem connection
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
3Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 98
Note: To check if the telephone port on the cable modem is active, connect an analog telephone, and then
listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Setting up fax in countries or regions with dierent telephone wall jacks and plugs
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 99
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility
is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or
region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug
from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Faxing 100
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ11 wall jack
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it
directly to the telephone adapter.
Faxing 101
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering
machines. The F port is for telephones. Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices
as shown.
Faxing 102
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a dierent ring pattern. This
may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double,
and triple ring patterns.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
bSelect the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 103
Notes:
•View the IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Set Date and Time.
3In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
Note: The use of network time is recommended.
4Click Submit.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Set Date and Time.
3Click the Automatically Observe DST check box.
4In the Custom Time Zone Setup section, set the DST start and end dates.
5Click Submit.
Sending a fax
Using the control panel
1Load the original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.
3If necessary, configure other fax settings.
4Send the fax job.
Using the computer
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient number.
Faxing 104
4If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5Send the fax job.
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
2Select the printer and enter the recipient number.
3If necessary, configure other fax settings.
4Send the fax job.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
4Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
5Tou ch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating shortcuts
Notes:
•Make sure that Fax Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > Fax Shortcuts > Display > Submit.
•To delete a fax shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete >
Delete now.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 105
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
3Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
•To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
•Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2Tou ch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
Faxing 106
4From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5Tou ch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Reports.
3Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
•In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers
you want to block.
Faxing 107
Canceling a fax job
1From the control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released
manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•O
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
4If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
aClick Fax Holding Schedule.
bFrom the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
cFrom the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
dFrom the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Faxing 108
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
•Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
•Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
•Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
•Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page
(duplex). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Faxing 109
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror
Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before
you fax the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Faxing 110
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support
person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup
process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using
its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 25.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
•Load the original document faceup.
•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
•Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.
Creating shortcuts
Notes:
•Make sure that FTP Shortcuts is set to Display. From the home screen, touch > Settings > General
Settings > Home screen customization > FTP Shortcuts > Display > Submit.
•To delete an FTP shortcut, touch > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcuts > the shortcut to delete >
Delete now.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning 111
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
4Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done
2Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
•If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
•If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the control panel
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
Notes:
•You can also enter the recipient using the shortcut number or address book.
•To add recipients, touch Next Number.
Scanning 112
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
•Load the original document faceup.
•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings).
•Place the document facedown in the corner with the arrow.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
•This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
•Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.
Scanning to a flash drive
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2Insert the flash drive into the USB port.
3Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
4Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Scanning 113
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu, then
TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
•XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Scanning 114
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you scan the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scanning 115
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Stapler Test
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Event Log Summary
Active NIC
Standard Network1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Settings Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu2
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
A list of installed DLEs (Download
Emulators) appears.
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 116
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for
Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
JIS‑B4
Letter
Legal
12 x 18
11 x 17
SRA3
A3
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty,
the print job continues using the linked tray.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 117
Use To
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x]
is the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom
Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
JIS‑B4
Letter
Legal
12 x 18
11 x 17
SRA3
A3
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP
Feeder Size to appear as a menu.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
The paper size value must be set.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 118
Use To
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
JIS B4
A3
11 x 17
Folio
Statement
Universal
SRA3
12 x 18
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 119
Use To
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual
Paper Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
•First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper
source.
Understanding the printer menus 120
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
O
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
11 x 17/A3
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not
available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 121
Use To
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only if the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card
Stock as the paper type.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 122
Use To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Glossy
as the paper type.
Heavy Glossy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy
Glossy as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels
as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond
as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light
as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy
as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough
or Cotton as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom
type is supported.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 123
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom
type name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom
Type [x] in the printer menus.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)
Height
1–17 inches (22–432 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
O
On
Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom
scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Custom Bin Names menu
Use To
Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin.
Understanding the printer menus 124
Use To
Bin [x] Specify a custom name for Bin [x].
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
•Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3.54–48 inches
89.9–1219 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
•12 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
•305 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
5.5–48 inches
139.7–1219 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
•17 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
•432 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either
direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than
the maximum width supported in the tray.
Bin Setup menu
Use To
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]*
Specify the default bin.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
* [x] can be any number from 1 to 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed. If multiple bins are assigned the
same name, then the name appears only once in the bin list.
Understanding the printer menus 125
Use To
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Specify configuration options for bins.
Notes:
•Mailbox is the factory default setting. This treats
each bin as a separate mailbox.
•Link configures all available bins as one large bin.
•Link Optional links together all available bins
except the standard bin and only appears when
at least two optional bins are installed.
•Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a
bin or linked bin set.
Overflow Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]*
Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full.
Notes:
•This menu appears only when optional bins are
installed.
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Glossy Bin
Heavy Glossy Bin
Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin
Select a bin for each supported paper type.
For each type, select from the following options:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin [x]*
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
* [x] can be any number from 1 to 4 if the appropriate optional bins are installed. If multiple bins are assigned the
same name, then the name appears only once in the bin list.
Understanding the printer menus 126
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays,
installed memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network
connection, and other information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and
number of printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is
installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers
connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network
option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log in the Fax
Settings menu is set to On.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log in the Fax
Settings menu is set to On.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set
in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 127
Use To
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or
printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Job Buer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure that the flash memory or hard disk is working and installed
correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial
number and model name.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Ecient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the
Ethernet network.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
Understanding the printer menus 128
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
NPA Mode
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a
wireless network.
Understanding the printer menus 129
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP
address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
O
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 130
Use To
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto
IP settings to O. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to O on
systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
O
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
O
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
O
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Ye s
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Ye s
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 131
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
•Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
O
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
O
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic
IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
O
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a
wireless network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network
when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point
with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Use To
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Ye s
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the
network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS
SmartSwitch is set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL
SmartSwitch is set to O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 134
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On buers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
Understanding the printer menus 135
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any print jobs already buered on the
printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The parallel buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On buers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
O
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•O disables parallel port negotiation.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Use To
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
•Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
O
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time
the computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
O
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of
a strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in
NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
•When set to O, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
•The serial buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. The printer does not buer print jobs on
the printer hard disk.
•On buers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•DTR is the factory default setting.
•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
O
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
•9600 is the factory default setting.
•138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in
the Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial
Option 1, Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Use To
Honor DSR
On
O
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port
uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by
electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray
characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from
printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by
the printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to
the SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server
determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-
mail.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail
and User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
O
On
Password
Create a backup password.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for Use Backup Password.
•This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos
Setup, Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Use To
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Apps Configuration
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer
control panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users
are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the
factory default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1
to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding
the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is
the factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a
lockout time.
•Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
home screen before automatically logging o the user. Settings range
from 1 to 900 seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains
idle before automatically logging o the user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
No Eect
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
•No Eect means the reset has no eect on the printer security
configuration.
•Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the
user has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the
user has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the
Miscellaneous Security menu.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Use To
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
•“Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided,
then the session is terminated immediately.
•“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then
the session is terminated immediately.
•“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is
provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is
provided, then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
•“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
O
2–10
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
•When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print
jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time
for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned o, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory
are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 143
Use To
Verify Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by
the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros,
and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit
the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files
without having to turn o the printer for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple
pass method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
•To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the
printer.
•To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a
computer.
Understanding the printer menus 144
Use To
Delete Log
Ye s
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Server
[256 character string]
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP
Stunnel
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Log full behavior
Wrap over oldest entries
E‑mail log then delete all
entries
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
•Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log
and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
•Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the
remote syslog server.
•Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits
logged events to a remote server.
•Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to
transmit logged events to a remote server. Normal UDP is the factory
default setting.
•Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses
when sending events to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default
setting.
•“Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely
fills its allotted memory. “Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default
setting.
Understanding the printer menus 145
Use To
Configure Log (continued)
Admin’s e-mail address
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports
O
On
Severity of events to log
0–7
Remote Syslog non-logged events
No
Yes
E-mail log cleared alert
No
Yes
E-mail log wrapped alert
No
Yes
E-mail % full alert
No
Yes
% full alert level
1–99
E-mail log exported alert
No
Yes
E-mail log settings changed alert
No
Yes
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
•“Admin’s e‑mail address” determines if administrators are
automatically notified of certain log events. This setting can have one
or more e‑mail addresses (separated by commas).
•“Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs
each exported security log. O is the factory default setting.
•“Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4
is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends
events to the remote server that have a severity level greater than
the value of the “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory
default setting.
•“E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to
the administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer
control panel or EWS. No is the factory default setting.
•“E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when log entries are wrapping. No is the
factory default setting.
•“E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator
an e‑mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space. No
is the factory default setting.
•“% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or
exceeds the value of the full alert level. 90 is the factory default
setting.
•“E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when there is a log exported. No is the factory
default setting.
•“E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log
setting is toggled. No is the factory default setting.
•“Log line endings” specifies how line endings will be handled in the
log file, depending on the operating system in which the file will be
parsed or viewed. “LF (\n)” is the factory default setting.
Set Date and Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the scanner.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 146
Use To
Automatically Observe DST
On
O
Set the scanner to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end
times associated with the scanner Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight
Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Oset
Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
O
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable Authentication
On
O
Enable the authentication setting.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 147
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you
may need to install special hardware for those languages to
appear.
Eco-Mode
O
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to
its factory default settings.
•Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be aected, but print quality is not.
•Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and paper
specialty media.
•Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty
media needed for a print job. Performance may be
aected, but print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Use To
Quiet Mode
O
On
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
•On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.
•For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet
Mode to O.
•Selecting Photo from the print driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Ye s
No
Set the printer to run the setup wizard.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. After completing the
setup wizard, the default becomes No.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks
and symbols from the keyboard.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Use To
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the default paper measurement.
Notes:
•US is the factory default setting.
•The initial setting is determined by your country or
region selection in the initial setup wizard.
•Changing this setting also changes the default setting for
each input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners
of the home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the
following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle,
Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•No is the factory default setting for Display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Use To
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Card Copy
Scan to Network
MyShortcut
Multi Send
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not display
Notes:
•Display is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax,
E‑mail, FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held Jobs, USB Drive,
Forms and Favorites, Card Copy, Scan to Network,
MyShortcut, and Multisend.
•Do not display is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, E‑mail
Shortcuts, FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Apps, Bookmarks,
and Jobs by user.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Notes:
•MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
•DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the control panel screen.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
O
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
O
Dim
Bright
Set the amount of light from the standard bin.
Notes:
•Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to
Energy or Energy/Paper.
•Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to
Paper or O.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Use To
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
O
Volume
1–10
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
Ye s
No
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs
area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
O
Specify whether image background removal is allowed in
copy, fax, e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of
the image is removed.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
O
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then
the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for
specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF.
Notes:
•Job level is the factory default setting. If selected, then
the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.
•If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed
page forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web
Server refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Use To
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm
Hole Punch Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
O
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.
Single sounds three quick beeps.
•O is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm,
Staple Alarm, and Hole Punch Alarm.
•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job
is printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
•20 is the factory default setting.
•Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to
O.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use.
Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready
to print with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Print with Display o
Allow printing with display o
Display on when printing
Allow the printer to print even when the display is o.
Note: Allow printing with display o is the factory default
setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate
mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Do Not Hibernate
Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an
active Ethernet connection.
Note: Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning to Ready state.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
O
Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to
the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive
an end‑of‑job message before canceling the rest of the print
job.
Notes:
•90 is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in
the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see
if any new print jobs are waiting.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation. This has no eect on PostScript emulation
print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for
additional data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
•40 is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no eect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
•30 is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a formatted printer hard
disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use To
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain
oine situations when not resolved within the specified time
period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
O
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
•O sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
O
Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
O
On
Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have
printed otherwise.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. This prints a partial
page when there is not enough memory to print the
whole page.
•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that
the entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button while the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Sleep is the factory default setting.
•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
•If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears
o and the Sleep button turns amber. Touch anywhere
on the display or press a button on the control panel to
wake the printer from Sleep mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the display is
completely o and the Sleep button turns amber and is
blinking.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button for 3 seconds or longer while the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
•Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
•If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears
o and the Sleep button turns amber. Touch anywhere
on the display or press a button on the control panel to
wake the printer from Sleep mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:
•Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps
the user‑defined settings.
•Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads
stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not
aected.
Export Configuration Package
Export
Export the printer configuration file to a flash drive.
Copy Settings menu
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text / P hoto
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then to
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Notes:
•1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the
copy will also have print on one side.
•1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while
the copy will have print on both sides.
•2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while
the copy will have print on just one side.
•2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and
the copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
O
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
O
Specify whether a border is printed.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Punch
O
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Staple
O
1 staple
2 staples
Enable or disable the staple finisher.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
O
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to On, a blank page is placed between transparencies.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the print for the copy job.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Use To
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin to be used for the copy job.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Number of Copies
1–9999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer
[Location]
O
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
•Top left
•Top middle
•Top right
•Bottom left
•Bottom middle
•Bottom right
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for the location.
•All pages is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
O
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
O
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Auto Center
O
On
Automatically center the content on the page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy
O
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use To
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Enable Manual Fax
On
O
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Notes:
•Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
•Tou ch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax
function.
•O is the factory default setting.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax
jobs.
Notes:
•Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending
and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
•Mostly send specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
•Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax
jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether the printer cancels fax jobs.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
O
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Use To
Fax number masking
O
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
•The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask
setting.
•O is the factory default setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
O by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
O
Include from Field
On
O
From
Include Message Field
On
O
Message
Include Logo
On
O
Include Footer [x]
On
O
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
•O by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
•O is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge
for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text / P hoto
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified
number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Ye s
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Ye s
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
O
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Ye s
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify a dialing sound.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l l ow - Bl u e
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
Temp eratur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans
O by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note: O by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
O
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
O
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer
Ye s
No
Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Notes:
•*9* is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
On
O
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the
designated fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
On
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
Separator Sheets
O
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify a bin for received faxes.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
O
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received
fax.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
•Fax is the factory default setting.
•This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP,
LDSS, or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
O
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax
ID specified.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
O
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
Punch
O
On
Specify whether prints are punched.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Staple
O
1 staple
2 staples
4 staples
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
O
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print Logs
On
O
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or
fax name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Use To
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for the printed fax logs.
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always O
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until
the fax connection is made.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Control the volume setting.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
O
On
Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Send me a copy
Max e‑mail size
Size Error Message
Limit destinations
Web Link Setup
Specify e‑mail server information.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the scanned file.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Set the version of the PDF file that is scanned for e‑mailing.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text / P hoto
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black
and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the document being scanned.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge
for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Ph oto Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page Ti
On
O
Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all
the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the
job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-
mail Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l l ow - Bl u e
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
Temp eratur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:
O
On
Enable the use of the “cc:” and “bcc:” fields.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text / P hoto
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black
and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Use To
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge
for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Text/Ph oto Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of
the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•Bin [x] appears only when an optional bin is installed.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Enter a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l l ow - Bl u e
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text / P hoto
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
O
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color or in black
and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge
for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Ph oto Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Enter a base file name.
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l l ow - Bl u e
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting
for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratur e
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
On
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Hole Punch
O
On
Specify whether prints have punched holes.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints.
Notes:
•3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory default
setting.
•This menu item appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Duplex Binding
Long edge
Short edge
Define binding for two-sided pages in relation to the page orientation of the printed
document.
Notes:
•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait
and top edge for landscape).
•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that are printed per side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate
is set to (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a
document .
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
•PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for
processing print jobs.
•PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing
print jobs.
•Setting a printer language default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use
another printer language.
Job Waiting
On
O
Determine if print jobs are removed from the print queue when
they require unavailable printer options or custom settings.
These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other
jobs print normally. When the missing information or options,
or both are obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only if a non-read‑only printer hard
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored
jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Use To
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the
Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the
boundary.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary.
This setting aects only pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter and has no eect on pages printed using the
PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in
the RAM is temporary.
•Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads
remain in the flash memory or printer hard disk even
when the printer is turned o.
•This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory
or printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
On
O
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such
as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer
receives a print job that requires more than the available
memory.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. O sets the printer to
retain downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
•On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, then Memory Full [38] appears on the
printer display, but downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are
printed when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting
Understanding the printer menus 185
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•1 sided is the factory default setting.
•You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way two‑sided pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then a blank
page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job.
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that are printed per
side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they
are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between
portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Staple Job
Auto
Back
Dual
Front
O
Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
On
O
Specify whether holes are created on printed outputs for the purpose of
collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose
of collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international
factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Oset Pages
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Oset pages at certain instances.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to (1,2,3)
(1,2,3). If Collate is set to (1,1,1) (2,2,2), then each set of printed pages are
oset, such as all page 1's and all page 2's.
•Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job
regardless of the number of copies printed.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch (dpi) or image quality.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Pixel Boost
O
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Enable more pixels to clarify and enhance images or text.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Determine the darkness of the printed output.
Notes:
•8 is the factory default setting.
•Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Enhance Fine Lines
On
O
Enhance the printed output to have smoother lines with sharper edges.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click
File > Print, and then click Properties or Preferences. For Macintosh users,
choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
context menus.
•To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer
IP address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
O
Adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
O
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold
expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Log Near Full Level
O
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log
Action at Near Full.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
Log Action at Near Full
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Log Action at Full
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the
maximum limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the
default log file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting aects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are
not aected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from
the printer hard disk or memory.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Format Flash
Ye s
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn o the printer while the flash
memory is being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory
card in the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buered
jobs, and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the
display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the
deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn o or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
O
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
O
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Ye s
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Use To
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
O
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
O
Disable the SysStart file.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory
option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buer Size must not be set to 100%.
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
•The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for
Download.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the
international factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display
but it cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the
page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default
setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•“198 mm” is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
O
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
O
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
dierent source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
•“O” is the factory default setting.
•“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option
appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Understanding the printer menus 194
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Tay
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTJA
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do
not specify a font.
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
O
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation
settings for some images.
Invert
On
O
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality
defects, and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 196
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their
impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce
materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This
chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as eighty percent of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You
can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions,
such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer,
see “Using recycled paper and other oce papers” on page 61.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two
sides of the paper.
Notes:
•Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
•For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper
by setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Saving money and the environment 197
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on
page 241.
Saving energy
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch
Submit.
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. O supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before
the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper •Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
•Turn o print log features.
3Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 198
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more
information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through
your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Saving money and the environment 199
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These eciencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle
the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making
it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One
hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for
recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or
cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 200
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is
attached, the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be
removed. Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory
(RAM) to temporarily buer user data during simple print
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality.
This lets the device retain buered user data from
complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Securing the printer 201
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered data, simply turn o the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following
these steps:
1Turn o the printer.
2From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons when the screen
with the progress bar appears.
3From the Configuration menu, navigate to:
Restore Factory Defaults > Erase Printer Memory > Ye s
The printer restarts several times during this process.
4Tou ch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
1Turn o the printer.
2From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons when the screen
with the progress bar appears.
3From the Configuration menu, navigate to:
Restore Factory Defaults > Erase Hard Disk > select the method to erase the hard disk memory > Ye s
Note: This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer is
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Tou ch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 202
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a hard disk installed.
1Turn o the printer.
2From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the
screen with the progress bar appears.
3Tou ch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption erases the contents of the hard disk.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn o the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer is
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk is encrypted, the printer
returns to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Tou ch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power-on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, go to the
Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server—Security: Administrator’s Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Securing the printer 203
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and
supplies, may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the
printer warranty.
1Make sure that the printer is turned o and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer
before proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the
exterior of the printer.
5Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1Open the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 204
2Wipe the areas shown with a soft or lint‑free cloth.
1White underside of the scanner cover
2Scanner glass
3ADF glass
4White underside of the ADF cover
3Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the charger and the printhead lens
1Open the bottom front door.
Maintaining the printer 205
2Remove the waste toner bottle.
3Locate the white tab.
4Gently pull the tab until it stops, and then slowly slide it back into place. Repeat three times.
Maintaining the printer 206
5Remove the printhead wiper.
6Insert the wiper into the hole until it stops, and then slide it out. Repeat three times.
7Put the wiper back to its holder.
8Reinstall the waste toner bottle.
9Close the bottom front door.
Maintaining the printer 207
Emptying the hole punch box
1Open door H.
2Remove and empty the hole punch box.
Maintaining the printer 208
3Reinstall the hole punch box.
4Close door H.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy
may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings,
and other printer settings.
Maintaining the printer 209
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption
is dierent from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing
or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial
estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization*
test methods and page content.
* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark
Authorized Supplies Dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use
of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies
or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Ordering a toner cartridge
Notes:
•The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.
Part name Part number
High Yield Toner Cartridge 64G0H00
Ordering a photoconductor unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause photoconductor unit parts to fail prior to
exhaustion of toner.
Item Part number
Photoconductor unit 54G0P00
Ordering a waste toner bottle
Item Part number
Waste toner bottle 54G0W00
Maintaining the printer 210
Ordering staple cartridges
Item Part number
Staple cartridges 25A0013
Ordering a 300K maintenance kit
Note: To replace the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that came with each
part.
Item Part number
Maintenance kit 40X9669
Storing parts and supplies
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing
until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Storing the rollers
Your printer comes with replacement rollers stored in the compartment inside the standard trays. After you
purchase new rollers, make sure to store them in the compartments inside the trays.
Note: For proper disposal of parts and supplies, see “Recycling” on page 199.
Maintaining the printer 211
Replacing supplies
Replacing a photoconductor unit
1Open the bottom front door.
2Remove the waste toner bottle.
3Unlock the photoconductor unit.
Maintaining the printer 212
4Remove the photoconductor unit.
5Unpack the new photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10
minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the print
quality of future print jobs.
6Install the photoconductor unit.
7Lock the photoconductor unit.
Maintaining the printer 213
8Reinstall the waste toner bottle.
9Close the bottom front door.
Replacing the staple cartridge
Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher
Note: The staple finisher is supported only in select printer models.
1Press the latch on the staple finisher, and then slide the finisher to the left.
Maintaining the printer 214
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.
4Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder.
Maintaining the printer 215
5Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place.
6Slide the finisher back into place.
Maintaining the printer 216
Replacing the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher
1Open door H, and then pull out the booklet maker.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
Maintaining the printer 217
3Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.
4Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder.
5Push the cartridge holder into the booklet maker until the holder clicks into place.
6Push the booklet maker back into place, and then close the door.
Maintaining the printer 218
Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple, hole punch finisher
1Open door H.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3Remove the empty staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.
Maintaining the printer 219
4Insert the new cartridge into the cartridge holder.
5Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place.
6Close door H.
Replacing the toner cartridge
1Open the top front door.
2Rotate the toner cartridge counterclockwise, and then pull it out.
Maintaining the printer 220
3Unpack the new toner cartridge, remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute
the toner.
4Insert the toner cartridge into the printer.
5Rotate the cartridge clockwise to lock it into place.
Maintaining the printer 221
2Remove the waste toner bottle.
3Clean the charger and the printhead lens. For more information, see steps 3–7 of “Cleaning the charger
and the printhead lens” on page 205.
4Unpack the new waste toner bottle.
5Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer until it clicks into place.
6Close the bottom front door.
Maintaining the printer 223
Replacing the 300K maintenance kit
Replacing the exhaust and ozone filters
1Exhaust filter
2Ozone filter
Replacing the exhaust filter
1Pull out the exhaust filter.
2Unpack the new exhaust filter.
Maintaining the printer 224
3Insert the new filter.
Replacing the ozone filter
1Pull out the ozone filter.
2Unpack the new ozone filter.
3Insert the new filter.
Maintaining the printer 225
2Remove all trays.
•Standard tray
•Optional 2 x 500‑ or 2500‑sheet tray
Note: To remove the optional 2 x 500‑sheet tray, follow the procedure in removing the standard tray.
3Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Note: If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, slide the tray to open the door.
Maintaining the printer 227
4Open door D.
Notes:
•You can only open door D if the optional 2 x 500‑ or 2500‑sheet tray is installed.
•If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, slide the tray to open the door.
5Locate the rollers.
Maintaining the printer 228
6Remove the rollers.
7Insert the new rollers until they click into place.
Note: Make sure to insert the rollers to their right places.
8Close doors C and D.
9Insert the trays.
Replacing the transfer module
Note: Use the screwdriver located inside the bottom front door of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 229
1Turn o the printer.
2Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Note: If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
3Remove the door stopper.
Maintaining the printer 230
4Loosen the screws of the transfer module lock.
5Remove the paper guide.
6Lift the transfer module using the handles, and then pull it out completely.
7Unpack the new transfer module.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the transfer belt to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer 231
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the transfer belt. Doing so may aect the print quality of
future print jobs.
8Insert the new transfer module until it clicks into place.
9Place the paper guide back into place.
10 Tighten the screws of the transfer module lock.
11 Reinstall the door stopper.
12 Close door C.
Replacing the transfer roller
1Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Note: If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
Maintaining the printer 232
2Pull out the transfer roller.
3Unpack the new transfer roller.
4Insert the new transfer roller until it clicks into place.
5Close door C.
Resetting the maintenance counter
1Turn o the printer.
2From the control panel, hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons when the screen
with the progress bar appears.
3From the Configuration menu, navigate to:
Reset Maintenance Counter > Reset 300K Maintenance Kit
4Tou ch Back, and then exit the Configuration menu.
Note: The printer performs a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Maintaining the printer 233
Replacing the ADF scan pad
1Open the scanner cover.
2Remove the ADF scan pad.
3Unpack the new ADF scan pad, and then remove the packing materials.
Maintaining the printer 234
4Lay the ADF scan pad flat on the scanner glass with the white area facedown.
5Close the scanner cover to stick the ADF scan pad to the cover, and then open the cover.
6Push the corners of the ADF scan pad to secure it into place.
7Close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 235
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
•Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer’s authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the
printer warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
•Using a flat‑head screwdriver, reinstall the screws to lock the scanner bed in place.
Note: Remove the screws after setting up the printer in another location.
Maintaining the printer 236
•If necessary, use a cart with a surface large enough to support the full dimensions of the printer.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging.
Maintaining the printer 237
Managing the printer
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to
be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status
of the printer, network, and supplies.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Managing the printer 238
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click the Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit
language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.
Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, near end‑of‑life, or
reach their end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Note: The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
SNMP Only The printer generates a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) alert when the
supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and
status page.
E‑mail The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
Managing the printer 239
Notification Description
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply
must be replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 50.
For a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, see “Erasing non‑volatile
memory” on page 202.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a
printer hard disk are not aected.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now
2Apply the changes.
Managing the printer 240
Clearing jams
Note: Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory
required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing
tightly against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
Clearing jams 241
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the
printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Notes:
•When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting
reprints jammed pages only if adequate printer memory is available.
Area name
1Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2Door C
3Door D
4Door F
5Trays
6Door H
Clearing jams 242
Area name
7Finisher bins
8Door J
9Area G
Area name Control panel message What to do
ADF [x]-page jam, press latch at area E to
open ADF's top cover. [28y.xx]
Open the ADF top door, and then
remove the jammed paper.
Multipurpose feeder [x]‑page jam, clear jammed paper from
the multipurpose feeder. [200.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the
feeder.
Door C, trays [x]‑page jam, open door C and clear all
jammed paper. [2yy.xx]
Open door C, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Pull out the tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray
and open door C. [2yy.xx]
Door D, trays [x]‑page jam, open door D and clear all
jammed paper. [24y.xx]
Open door D, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Pull out the tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray
and open door D. [24y.xx]
Doors C and F [x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray
and open door F. [24y.xx]
Pull the 3000‑sheet tray, and then
remove the jammed paper from the side
of the tray.
Open door F, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Area G, doors C, J, and H,
finisher bin
[x] page jam, open doors G, H, and J and
clear jammed paper. [4yy.xx]
Open door G, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Open door H, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Doors C and G, finisher bin [x]‑page jam, press latch beside door G
and slide finisher to the left. Leave paper
in bin. [40y.xx]
Slide the staple finisher to the left, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Area G, doors C, J, and H,
finisher bin
[x]‑page jam, open door H and rotate
knob SD3 clockwise. Leave paper in bin.
[426.xx–428.xx]
Open door H, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Clearing jams 243
[x]‑page jam, clear jammed paper from multipurpose
feeder. [200.xx]
1Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Open door C to remove any paper fragments.
Note: Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
4Close door C.
5Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
6Reload the paper.
[x]‑page jam, open door C and clear all jammed
paper. [2yy.xx]
1Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
2Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 244
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
•Fuser area
•Below the fuser area
•Duplex area
•Above the duplex area
Clearing jams 245
3Open the standard trays, and then locate the jammed paper.
4Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
5Close the trays and door C.
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door
C. [2yy.xx]
1Slide the 3000‑sheet tray.
Clearing jams 246
2Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
3Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
•Fuser area
•Below the fuser area
Clearing jams 247
•Duplex area
•Above the duplex area
4Open the standard trays, and then locate the jammed paper.
5Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
6Close the trays and door C.
7Slide the 3000‑sheet tray back into place.
Clearing jams 248
[x]‑page jam, open door D and clear all jammed
paper. [24y.xx]
1Open door D, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
2Open the optional tray, and then locate the jammed paper.
3Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the tray and door D.
Clearing jams 249
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door
D. [24y.xx]
1Slide the 3000‑sheet tray.
2Open door D, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3Open the optional tray, and then locate the jammed paper.
4Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 250
5Close the tray and door D.
6Slide the 3000‑sheet tray back into place.
[x]‑page jam, slide the 3000‑sheet tray and open door
F. [24y.xx]
1Slide the 3000‑sheet tray.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 251
3Open door F, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4Close door F.
5Open door C. Make sure that it does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
6Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:
Clearing jams 252
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
•Fuser area
•Below the fuser area
•Duplex area
Clearing jams 253
•Above the duplex area
7Close door C, and then slide the 3000‑sheet tray back into place.
[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H, and J and clear jammed
paper. Leave paper in bin. [4yy.xx]
1Open door G, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
2Open door J, and then lift handle J1 to its upright position.
Clearing jams 254
3Open door H.
4Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
•Door J
Note: If there is a jammed paper between the finisher bins, then remove the paper.
Clearing jams 255
•Areas H1 and H2
•Areas H3 and H4
•Area H6
5Close Door H.
6Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Clearing jams 256
Notes:
•Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
•If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
7Close door C.
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G. Leave paper in
bin. [40y.xx]
1Remove all paper from the staple finisher bin.
Clearing jams 257
2Press the latch and slide the staple finisher to the left, and then remove the jammed paper.
Notes:
•Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
•If necessary, turn spinner wheel G1 downward to feed jammed paper into the finisher bin, and then
remove the paper.
Clearing jams 258
3Slide the finisher back into place.
4Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Notes:
•Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
•Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
•If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
5Close door C.
Clearing jams 259
[x]‑page jam, press latch to access area G and clear
jammed staples. Leave paper in bin. [402.93]
1Remove all paper from the staple finisher bin.
2Press the latch on the staple finisher, and then slide the finisher to the left.
3Remove the staple cartridge holder.
Clearing jams 260
4Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.
5Press the staple guard down until it clicks into place.
6Press the staples against the metal bracket.
Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the
staples near the metal bracket.
Clearing jams 261
7Push the cartridge holder into the finisher until the holder clicks into place.
8Slide the finisher back into place.
Clearing jams 262
[x]‑page jam, open door H and rotate knob H6 clockwise.
Leave paper in bin. [426.xx–428.xx]
If the jammed paper is located under door G, then open the door and remove the paper.
1Open door J, and then lift handle J1.
2Open door H.
Clearing jams 263
3Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
•Door J
Note: If there is a jammed paper between the finisher bins, then remove the paper.
•Areas H1 and H2
Clearing jams 264
•Areas H3 and H4
•Area H6
4Using handle H5, pull out the booklet maker.
5Remove the jammed paper from any of the following locations:
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 265
•Area H8
•Area H9
Clearing jams 266
•Area H10
6Push the booklet maker back into place.
7Close door H.
8Open door C, and then remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Notes:
•Make sure that door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
•Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
•If the 3000‑sheet tray is installed, then slide the tray to the right to open the door.
9Close door C.
Clearing jams 267
[x]‑page jam, press latch at area E to open ADF’s top
cover. [28y.xx]
1Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2Open the top ADF top cover.
3Remove jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the cover.
5Open the scanner cover, and then open the bottom ADF door.
6Remove jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 268
7Close the door.
8Close the scanner cover.
Clearing jams 269
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see “Replacing the toner
cartridge” on page 220.
If necessary, touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu
on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the size and type of paper in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available size and type of paper in the current tray or
feeder.
Troubleshooting 270
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Tou ch Use current [paper source] to use the available paper size and type in the tray.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Close door [x]
Close the specified door.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job has been removed.
•The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a dierent
printer model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the defective flash memory card.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Troubleshooting 271
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Empty the hole punch box
Try one or more of the following:
•Empty the hole punch box.
•Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the print job.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Troubleshooting 272
Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray or feeder, and then specify the paper size and type in
the Paper menu on the control panel.
•Make sure that the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog
settings.
•Check the length and width guides and make sure that the paper is loaded properly in the tray or feeder.
•From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and then print using a dierent tray.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 273
Insert hole punch box
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Insert the specified tray into the printer.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.
Insucient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
Insucient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin
collating the rest of the print job.
•Cancel the current print job.
Insucient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and
continue printing.
Insucient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Insucient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Insucient space between paper stacks in Tray 3
Move the paper stacks apart, and then touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and
continue printing.
Troubleshooting 274
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper
on the control panel.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper
on the control panel.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, and then touch Finished loading paper on the
control panel.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, and then touch Finished
loading paper on the control panel.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Multipurpose Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the control panel, touch one of the following:
–Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and
continue printing.
–Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
–Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 275
Load Multipurpose Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the control panel, touch one of the following:
–Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and
continue printing.
–Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
–Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Multipurpose Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
•From the control panel, touch one of the following:
–Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and
continue printing.
–Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
–Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Multipurpose Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the control panel, touch one of the following:
–Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded—To clear the message and
continue printing.
–Automatically select paper—To use the paper loaded in the tray.
–Reset active bin—To reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Cancel the print job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace or insert the staple cartridge in the finisher.
For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher, touch More information on
the printer control panel.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 276
Load staples [G11, G12]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace or insert the staple cartridge into the finisher.
For instructions on replacing or inserting the staple cartridge into the finisher, touch More information
on the control panel.
•From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the print job.
[x] maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, go to the Lexmark support
Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Install additional printer memory.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt
to print after the printer is restarted.
Memory full, cannot send faxes
1From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2Try one or more of the following:
•Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
•Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 277
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Tou ch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
•Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Open door H and remove paper from beneath area H10
Remove the paper from the specified area.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Photoconductor low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement photoconductor. If necessary, select Continue on the control panel
to clear the message and continue printing.
Photoconductor very low [84.xy]
You may need to replace the photoconductor unit very soon. For more information, see “Replacing a
photoconductor unit” on page 212.
If necessary, touch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 278
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace
the toner cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive photoconductor [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•If the photoconductor unit is missing, then install it. For more information, see “Replacing a
photoconductor unit” on page 212.
•If the photoconductor unit is installed, then remove and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the defective
photoconductor unit.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove packaging material, open door C, remove metal clips, remove all
screws from scanner carriage
Open door C and the scanner cover, and then remove any remaining packaging material.
Note: Make sure door C does not hit any cable attached to the printer.
Remove paper from all bins
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes
printing.
Troubleshooting 279
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
•Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Tou ch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s
Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer
region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number Region
0Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
Troubleshooting 280
Region number Region
9 Invalid
Notes:
•The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
•The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
•Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Tou ch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact your service representative, and then report the message.
Replace missing photoconductor [31.xy]
Install the missing photoconductor unit to clear the message. For more information, see “Replacing a
photoconductor unit” on page 212.
Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply.
Replace missing cartridge [31.xy]
Install the missing cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see “Replacing the toner cartridge”
on page 220.
Troubleshooting 281
Replace paper pick rollers in [paper source], use parts and instructions in
tray 1 or tray 2 compartment [80]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the pick rollers, and then touch Rollers replaced on the control panel to clear the message
and continue printing.
•Tou ch Continue and replace later (Jams may continue to occur) to ignore the message and continue
printing.
Replace photoconductor, 0 pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the photoconductor unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see “Replacing a photoconductor unit” on page 212.
Note: If you do not have a replacement photoconductor unit, then see “Ordering supplies” on page 210
or go to www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s
Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported photoconductor [32.xy]
Remove the photoconductor unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue
printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see “Replacing a
photoconductor unit” on page 212.
Note: If you do not have a replacement photoconductor unit, then see “Ordering supplies” on page 210
or go to www.lexmark.com.
Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
•From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 282
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system
support person.
•Tou ch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner maintenance required, use ADF Kit [80]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact your service representative, and then report the message.
Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
Contact customer support, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
•Make sure Serial Buer is not set to Disabled.
•From the printer control panel, set Serial Buer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 283
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the
message.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
•Install the missing supply to complete the job.
•Cancel the current job.
The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled
or provide unexpected results.
Tou ch Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Too many flash options installed [58]
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Continue on the control panel to continue printing.
•Remove the extra flash memory:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Troubleshooting 284
3Remove the extra trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
Replace with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be
replaced.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a
supported card.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]
You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 285
Solving printer problems
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep
button to wake the
printer from Sleep
mode or Hibernate
mode.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and
the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match
the following:
•The USB symbol
on the cable with
the USB symbol
on the printer
•The appropriate
Ethernet cable
with the Ethernet
port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned o by a switch or
breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting 286
Action Yes No
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the
printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any
packing material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn o the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the
hardware options,
and then turn on the
printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer
driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 287
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Turn o the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller
board.
aTurn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the
power cord from the electrical outlet.
bMake sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
cConnect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly
grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the
controller board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal
option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Troubleshooting 288
Action Yes No
Step 4
aCheck if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the
printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see “Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 45.
bResend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the internal print server.
aRemove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on
page 32.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print
server is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.
Note: An internal
print server from
another printer may
not work with this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected
to the internal print server.
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
aInstall the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 32.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
aUse the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the ISP.
bCheck if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected
into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on
the controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure
that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
bCheck if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aTurn o the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information,
see the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Troubleshooting 290
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 45.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
aInstall the USB or parallel interface card. For more information,
see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 32.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features
list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface
card.
Note: A USB or
parallel interface
card from another
printer may not work
on this printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the USB or parallel interface card.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
bFrom the Jam Recovery menu, select On or Auto.
cSave your changes.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 291
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
bInsert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aReview the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 241.
bFollow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
aRemove any jammed paper.
bFrom the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the
message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 292
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory
to process additional held jobs.
Action Yes No
Step 1
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify
that your print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
Go to step 2. Select one of the
Print and Hold
options, and then
resend the print job.
For more
information, see
“Printing held jobs”
on page 73.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then send it again.
•For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first
one.
For Windows users
aOpen the Print Properties folder.
bFrom the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate
documents” check box.
cEnter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job dierently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held
jobs.
Does the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Add additional
printer memory.
Troubleshooting 293
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes No
aUse envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can
seal the flaps.
bResend the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear
USB port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB
port.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking
green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer
is ready, then view
the held jobs list, and
then print the
documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aCheck for an error message on the display.
bClear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives,
see “Supported flash drives and file types” on page 72.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 294
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the display, then turn o the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex
Trace mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set PCL SmartSwitch or PS SmartSwitch
to On.
bResend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper
size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, open Printing
Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the trays are not linked.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 295
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set
Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides
the setting in the Finishing menu.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number
and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the
number of pages in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed
all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with
Adobe Acrobat.
bGenerate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aOpen the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
bClick File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 296
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDisable Eco‑Mode.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > O
Note: Disabling Eco‑Mode may increase the consumption of
energy or paper, or both.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity
of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then
resend the job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aRemove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aDisable the Page Protect feature.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect
> O
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aCheck if the cable connections to the printer and print server
are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 297
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog
and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must
select the printer for each document that you want to print.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aCheck if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the printer display.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the
message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if
the cables are securely connected to the computer and the
printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aTurn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
aRemove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer” on page 45.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 298
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•The trays can detect paper length.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the
Paper Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aOpen the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the
same size and type.
•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be
linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be
linked.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
bIncrease the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
cResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Check the original
file for manual page
breaks.
Troubleshooting 299
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPrint a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are
supported by the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Tou ch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
bUse a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that
you want to use. For more information, contact your system
support person.
cResend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven
edges?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aUse a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that
you want to use on your computer. For more information,
contact your system support person.
bResend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven
edges?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 300
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aRemove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 301
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the control panel, decrease the toner
darkness.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aRemove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit and the
toner cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 302
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure that your software program is using a correct fill
pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aRemove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Troubleshooting 303
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper size loaded.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
type and weight from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Troubleshooting 304
Action Yes No
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if there is a packing material left on the photoconductor
unit.
1Remove the photoconductor unit.
2Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10
minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print
quality problems.
3Reinstall the photoconductor unit.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 305
Action Yes No
Step 2
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 306
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the paper size loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the size and type of the paper loaded
in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
size and type in the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight in Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the control
panel, set the paper
texture in the Paper
menu to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 307
Action Yes No
Step 7
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact customer
support or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too dark
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aFrom the control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper type,
texture, and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Troubleshooting 308
Action Yes No
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the control
panel, change the
texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are
printing on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too light
Troubleshooting 309
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type, texture, and
weight to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the control
panel, change the
texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are
printing on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 310
Action Yes No
Step 7
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
Is the print still too light?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Repeating defects appear on prints
Action Yes No
Step 1
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aReplace the photoconductor unit if the distance between the
defects is equal to 95.8 mm (3.77 in.).
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aReplace the 300K maintenance kit if the distance between the
defects is equal to either of the following:
•62.65 mm (2.47 in.)
•75.85 mm (2.99 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 311
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type
and weight in the
tray.
Step 2
From the control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified
in the tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 312
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aCheck if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the
tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Troubleshooting 313
Action Yes No
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 314
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the photoconductor unit.
1Remove the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10
minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print
quality problems.
2Install the photoconductor unit.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 315
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aReinstall the photoconductor unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Toner rubs o
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Troubleshooting 316
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type, texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub o?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Step 1
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
aCheck if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
bResend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 317
Uneven print density
Action Yes No
Step 1
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aFrom the control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 318
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove the photoconductor unit, and then reinstall it.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the
photoconductor unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aClean the charger and the printhead lens.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the photoconductor unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Troubleshooting 319
Action Yes No
Step 3
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
it back on.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 2. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper
loaded in the tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the
Paper Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 3. Change the paper
size setting to match
the paper loaded in
the tray, or load the
tray with paper that
matches the paper
size setting.
Step 3
aSpecify the paper size. Depending on your operating system,
specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution setting for
a higher‑quality
output.
Troubleshooting 320
Action Yes No
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and
the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 204.
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
aFrom the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
bIf the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 5. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 300.
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on
the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 6. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content
Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select
a lower setting
Note: Make sure that no scaling is being selected.
bResend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Go to step 8. The problem is
solved.
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
bAdjust the settings:
•Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
•Contrast—Increase the current setting.
cResend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Go to step 9. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 321
Action Yes No
Step 9
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
bAdjust the settings of the following:
•Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
•Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
cResend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line
is subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
•If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you
may have to change the default setting. There are two
settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
•The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
•Contact your telephone company to determine which
pattern or switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 322
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on
the display.
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
•Telephone
•Handset
•Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 5. Securely connect
the cables.
Step 5
aCheck the telephone wall jack.
1Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2Listen for a dial tone.
3If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a dierent telephone
cable into the wall jack.
4If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone
cable into a dierent wall jack.
5If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall
jack.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting 323
Action Yes No
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the
correct digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be
connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can
be used.
•If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect
the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port)
on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to
request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router
that will support analog use. For more information, contact
your DSL provider.
•If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure
you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If
none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone
line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector?
Go to step 7. Connect the printer
to an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 8. •Try calling the fax
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
•If the telephone
line is being used
by another
device, then wait
until the other
device is finished
before sending a
fax.
•If you are using
the On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear
a dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters)
between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending
or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 9.
Troubleshooting 324
Action Yes No
Step 9
aTemporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily
disabling call waiting.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 10.
Step 10
aTemporarily disable voice mail service. For more information,
contact your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 11.
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
aDial the fax number.
bScan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax
mode, and then send the fax.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Load the original document properly into the ADF tray or on the
scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
•Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone
number that you want to dial.
•Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 325
Can send but not receive faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you
want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
dClick Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
•Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
•The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Troubleshooting 326
Action Yes No
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Ye s >
Submit
bTurn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer
display.
cSelect a language, and then touch .
dSelect a country or region, and then touch Next.
eSelect a time zone, and then touch Next.
fSelect Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Received fax has poor print quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
aCheck if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
bIncrease the fax scan resolution, if possible.
cResend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 327
Action Yes No
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
•2400
•4800
•9600
•14400
•33600
dClick Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the
cartridge, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 328
Solving scanner problems
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the
printer display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print
server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Contact customer
support.
Tighten the cable
connections.
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Contact customer
support.
Load the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Poor scanned image quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution settings
for a higher‑quality
output.
Troubleshooting 329
Action Yes No
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free
cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 204.
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on
the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 5. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
•From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
•When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 6. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 300.
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure that the Content Type and
Content Source settings are correct for the document being
scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Problem solved. Contact customer
support.
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to
the computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Go to step 2. Connect the cables
properly.
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Change the file
name.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 330
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing
file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box
selected in the destination configuration settings?
Contact customer
support.
Select the Append
time stamp or
Overwrite existing
file check box in the
destination
configuration
settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 331
The scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and
the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 3. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment
and then go to step
6.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 332
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab >
Log.
cFrom the Filter menu, select an application status.
dFrom the Application menu, select an application, and then
click Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:
•From the printer home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,
and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Go to step 2. Type the correct
printer IP address in
the address field of
your Web browser.
Note: Depending on
the network
settings, you may
need to type
“https://” instead
of “http://” before
the printer IP
address to access
the Embedded Web
Server.
Troubleshooting 333
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Step 3
Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Go to step 4. Contact your system
support person.
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Go to step 5. Tighten the cable
connection.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing
certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?
Go to step 6. Contact your system
support person.
Step 6
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP
address in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing,
the message on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the
back of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech
Library
You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to
help you solve common problems.
E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative
will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer
problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can
remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates,
or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product.
Troubleshooting 334
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX910de, MX911dte, MX912dxe
Machine type:
7421
Model(s):
036, 236, 436
Edition notice
July 2017
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 336
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International,
Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Tay Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 337
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\NOTICES directory of the
installation software CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing One-sided: 52 (MX910de), 53
(MX911de, MX911dte), 55 (MX912de,
MX912dxe); Two-sided: 55 (MX910de,
MX911de, MX911dte), 56 (MX912de,
MX912dxe)
Scanning 57 (MX910de); 56 (MX911de,
MX911dte, MX912de, MX912dxe)
Notices 338
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Copying 53 (MX910de); 54 (MX911de,
MX911dte); 55 (MX911de, MX911dte)
Ready 29 (MX910de); 31 (MX911de,
MX911dte, MX912de, MX912dxe)
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your
local sales oce phone number.
Taiwan RoHS information 限用物質含有情況標示
設備名稱：雷射印表機或多功能印表機
Equipment name: Laser Printer or
Multifunction Printer
型號（型式）：請參閱注意事項章節
Type designation (Type): Please see the Notices section.
單元
Unit
限用物質及其化學符號
Restricted substances and their chemical symbols
鉛
Lead (Pb)
汞
Mercury
(Hg)
鎘
Cadmium
(Cd)
六價鉻
Hexavalent
chromium (Cr
VI)
多
溴
聯苯
Polybrominated
biphenyl (PBB)
多
溴
二苯醚
Polybrominated
diphenylether
(PBDE)
電路板
Circuit boards
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
電源供應器
Power supply
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
電源線
Power cords
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
連接器 超出 ◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
Notices 339
設備名稱：雷射印表機或多功能印表機
Equipment name: Laser Printer or
Multifunction Printer
型號（型式）：請參閱注意事項章節
Type designation (Type): Please see the Notices section.
單元
Unit
限用物質及其化學符號
Restricted substances and their chemical symbols
鉛
Lead (Pb)
汞
Mercury
(Hg)
鎘
Cadmium
(Cd)
六價鉻
Hexavalent
chromium (Cr
VI)
多
溴
聯苯
Polybrominated
biphenyl (PBB)
多
溴
二苯醚
Polybrominated
diphenylether
(PBDE)
Connectors (exceeding)
0.1 wt %
機械組件—軸,
滾軸
Mechanical
assemblies—
shafts, rollers
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
機械組件—馬達
Mechanical
assemblies—
motors
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
機械組件—其他
Mechanical
assemblies—
other
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
掃描器組件,僅適
用於多功能印表
機產品
Scanner
assembly, for
multifunction
printer only
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
液晶顯示面板
LCD display
超出
(exceeding)
0.1 wt %
◯◯ ◯ ◯ ◯
備考 1.〝超出 0.1 wt %〞及〝超出 0.01 wt %〞係指限用物質之百分比含量超出百分比含量基準值。
Note 1：“Exceeding 0.1 wt %” and “exceeding 0.01 wt %” indicate that the percentage content of the restricted
substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition.
備考 2.〝◯〞係指該項限用物質之百分比含量未超出百分比含量基準值。
Note 2：“◯” indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of
reference value of presence condition.
備考 3.〝－〞係指該項限用物質為排除項目。
Note 3： “－” indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.
Notices 340
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in
concentrations exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in
Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching
the metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped
by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Shipping temperature -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
15 to 85% RH
Notices 341
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 15‑milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787–800 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be axed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner ernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und oener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην
ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic
inputs.
One-sided: 865 (MX910de), 925
(MX911de, MX911dte), 985 (MX912de,
MX912dxe); Two-sided: 790
(MX910de), 850 (MX911de, MX911dte),
890 (MX912de, MX912dxe)
Notices 342
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy
original documents.
880 (MX910de); 950 ( MX911de,
MX911dte); 1000 (MX912de, MX912dxe)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 230
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 220
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 3.6
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.6
O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power
switch is turned o.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response
time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified
between one hour and one month.
O mode
If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Notices 343
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Japanese VCCI notice
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating
to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity
requirements of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
Notices 344
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and
modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is
also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of
this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm
equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
Notices 345
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time
it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance
transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the
equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés
n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro
REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là
d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un
parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur
répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL
(Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout
endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notices 346
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item
of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions
for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another
item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible
with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following
limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and
•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt
and the beginning of the next call attempt.
•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to dierent numbers are spaced such that there
is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified
by JATE, with Certification Number A11-0160001.
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which
receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog
telephone lines in Switzerland.
Notices 347
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être
utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark
Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen
werden. Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee
che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti
su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of
the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the
restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain
transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Notices 348
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other
regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and
any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and
maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio
interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically
radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away
from windows to provide maximum shielding.
Industrie Canada (Canada)
Selon la règlementation d'Industrie Canada, l'émetteur radio ne fonctionner qu'avec une antenne dont le type
et le gain maximal (ou inférieur) ont été approuvés par Industrie Canada. Pour réduire les interférences radio
potentielles auprès d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être choisis de telle sorte que la
puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas supérieure à ce qui est nécessaire pour assurer la
réussite de la communication.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est
soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter
toutes les interférences, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.
Pour éviter toute interférence radio au service sous licence, cet appareil est destiné à être utilisé à l'intérieur
et à l'écart des fenêtres afin d'assurer une protection maximale.
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of
the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the
restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Notices 349
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC
Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se
základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Notices 350
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux
exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende
krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais
e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Notices 351
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
Notices 352
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
Notices 353
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher
Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with
SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to
Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in
the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites
for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic
Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version
1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
Notices 354
Index
Numerics
300K maintenance kit
ordering 211
Symbols
[x] maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 277
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[200.xx] 244
[x]‑page jam, detach the
3000‑sheet tray and open door
F. [24y.xx] 251
[x]‑page jam, open door C and
clear all jammed media.
[2yy.xx] 244
[x]‑page jam, open door D and
clear all jammed media.
[24y.xx] 249
[x]‑page jam, open door H and
rotate knob H6 clockwise. Leave
paper in bin. [426.xx–
428.xx] 263
[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H,
and J and clear jammed paper.
Leave paper in bin. [400–
402] 254
[x]‑page jam, press latch at area E
to open ADF’s top cover. [28y.xx]
printer messages 268
[x]‑page jam, press latch to
access area G and clear jammed
staples. Leave paper in bin.
[402.93] 260
[x]‑page jam, press latch to
access area G. Leave paper in
bin. [40y.xx] 257
[x]‑page jam, slide the
3000‑sheet tray and open door
C. [2yy.xx] 246
[x]‑page jam, slide the
3000‑sheet tray and open door
D. [24y.xx] 250
A
accessing the controller
board 27
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 20
Active NIC menu 128
adapter plug 99
adding hardware options
print driver 45
adding internal options
print driver 45
ADF scan pad
replacing 234
adjusting copy quality 79
adjusting printer display
brightness 199
adjusting Sleep mode 199
adjusting toner darkness 70
advanced options, touch‑screen
copy 83
e‑mail 88
fax 110
FTP 115
answering machine
setting up 90
AppleTalk menu 133
applications
home screen 22
understanding 21
attaching cables 44
automatic document feeder
(ADF)
using 14
available internal options 27
avoiding jams 63
avoiding paper jams 241
B
Bin Setup menu 125
blocking junk faxes 107
buttons, control panel 15
buttons, touch screen
using 18
C
cables
Ethernet 44
USB 44
canceling a fax job 108
canceling a print job
from the computer 75
from the printer control
panel 75
canceling an e-mail 86
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 333
Card Copy
setting up 23
card stock
tips 58
Cartridge low [88.xy] 270
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 270
Cartridge very low [88.xy] 270
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 271
changing output file type
e‑mailing 86
changing port settings
internal solutions port 49
charger
cleaning 205
checking an unresponsive
printer 286
checking status of parts and
supplies 209
checking the status of parts and
supplies 209
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 238
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 238
cleaning
exterior of the printer 204
scanner glass 204
cleaning the charger 205
cleaning the printer 204
cleaning the printhead lens 205
Close door [x] 271
Index 355
collate
copy options 82
collating copies
copying 79
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 271
confidential data
information on securing 203
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 74
confidential print jobs 73
Confidential Print menu 143
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 271
configuration information
wireless network 46
Configure MP menu 120
configuring
multiple printers 239
configuring e‑mail settings 84
configuring port settings 49
configuring supply
notifications 239
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 103
connecting the printer to an
outlet 10
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
method 48
using Push Button Configuration
method 48
using the Embedded Web
Server 49
using wireless setup wizard 47
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 199
conserving supplies 197
Eco‑Mode 198
Hibernate mode 198
Sleep Mode 199
conserving supplies 197
contacting customer support 334
content
e‑mail settings 87
content source
e‑mail settings 87
fax options 109
content type
e‑mail settings 87
fax options 109
control panel 15
factory defaults, restoring 240
control panel, printer
indicator light 15
Sleep button light 15
controller board
accessing 27
copies
copy options 82
copy options
collate 82
copies 82
darkness 82
Save As Shortcut 82
sides (duplex) 82
copy quality
adjusting 79
copy screen
advanced options 83
content source 82
content type 82
options 81, 82
Copy Settings menu 157
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 319
partial document or photo
copies 320
poor copy quality 320
poor scanned image
quality 329
scanner unit does not close 331
copying
canceling a copy job 81
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 77
on both sides of the paper
(two‑sided) 79
copying dierent paper sizes 78
copying from
selected tray 78
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 80
copying on both sides of the
paper (two‑sided) 79
copying on letterhead 77
copying on transparencies 77
copying photos 76
copying to a dierent size 78
creating a fax destination
shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 105
creating an e‑mail shortcut
using the control panel 85
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 111
Custom Bin Names menu 124
custom job
copying 80
Custom Names menu 124
custom paper type
assigning 57
custom paper type name
creating 56
Custom Scan Sizes menu 124
Custom Types menu 124
customer support
contacting 334
D
darkness
copy options 82
e‑mail options 87
fax options 109
scan options 114
date and time, fax
setting 103
daylight saving time, faxing 104
Default Source menu 117
Defective flash detected [51] 271
delayed send
fax options 109
device and network settings
information
erasing 202
dierent paper sizes, copying 78
dierent size
copying to 78
digital subscriber line (DSL)
fax setup 95
digital telephone service
fax setup 98
directory list
printing 74
Disk full [62] 272
Disk full, scan job canceled 272
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 272
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 288
display, control panel 15
display, printer control panel
adjusting brightness 199
Index 356
disposing of printer hard
disk 201
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 103
documents, printing
from a computer 70
door C
paper jams, clearing 244, 246
door D
paper jams, clearing 249, 250
DSL filter 95
E
Eco‑Mode setting 198
Edit Security Setups menu 141
embedded solutions information
erasing 202
Embedded Web Server
accessing 20
adjusting brightness 199
checking the status of
parts 209
checking the status of
supplies 209
copying settings to other
printers 239
creating a fax destination
shortcut 105
creating an FTP shortcut 111
creating e‑mail shortcuts 85
initial fax setup 90
modifying confidential print
settings 74
problem accessing 333
setting up e‑mail alerts 238
Embedded Web Server—
Security: Administrator’s Guide
where to find 203
emission notices 338, 344, 349
Empty the hole punch box 272
emptying the hole punch
box 208
encrypting the printer hard
disk 203
enlarging a copy 79
envelopes
tips on using 58
environmental settings
conserving supplies 197
Eco‑Mode 198
Hibernate mode 198
printer display brightness,
adjusting 199
Sleep Mode 199
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 144
erasing hard disk memory 202
erasing non‑volatile
memory 202
erasing volatile memory 202
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 272
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 272
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 46
Ethernet port 44
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 46
exhaust filter
replacing 224
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
EXT port 44
exterior of the printer
cleaning 204
e‑mail
canceling 86
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 238
paper jam 238
setting up 238
e‑mail options
darkness 87
message 87
original size 87
page setup 88
recipient(s) 86
resolution 87
Save As Shortcut 87
Send As 87
subject 86
e‑mail screen
advanced options 88
options 87, 88
E‑mail Settings menu 170
e‑mail shortcut, creating
using the control panel 85
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 85
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 86
e‑mailing
configuring e‑mail settings 84
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 85
using a shortcut number 86
using the address book 86
e‑mailing a document
using the control panel 85
F
factory defaults
restoring 240
fax
sending at a scheduled
time 105
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 326
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 326
fax job
canceling 108
Fax memory full 273
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 162
fax name, setting 103
fax number, setting 103
fax options
content source 109
content type 109
darkness 109
delayed send 109
page setup 109
resolution 109
scan preview 110
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 273
fax port 44
fax screen
advanced options 110
options 110
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 273
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 99
digital telephone service 98
DSL connection 95
standard telephone line
connection 90
VoIP 96
Index 357
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 273
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 273
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 322
can receive but not send
faxes 325
can send but not receive
faxes 326
cannot send or receive a
fax 323
received fax has poor print
quality 327
faxing
blocking junk faxes 107
changing resolution 106
configuring the printer to
observe daylight saving
time 104
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 105
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 106
distinctive ring service 103
fax setup 90
forwarding faxes 108
holding faxes 108
making a fax lighter or
darker 107
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 105
setting the date and time 103
setting the fax number 103
setting the outgoing fax
name 103
viewing a fax log 107
FCC notices 338, 345, 349
feet
stabilizing 38
file name
scan options 114
finding more information about
the printer 9
finding printer IP address 20
finding the IP address of the
computer 20
finisher
supported paper sizes 67
supported paper types 67
supported paper weights 67
Finishing menu 186
firmware card 27
flash drive
printing from 71
scanning 113
Flash Drive menu 179
flash drives
supported file types 72
font sample list
printing 74
Forms and Favorites
setting up 22
forwarding faxes 108
FTP
FTP options 114
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 112
FTP address, scanning to
using the control panel 112
FTP options
FTP 114
FTP screen
advanced options 115
FTP Settings menu 175
G
General Settings menu 148
green settings
Eco‑Mode 198
Hibernate mode 198
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 45
held jobs 73
printing from a Macintosh
computer 73
printing from Windows 73
held print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 73
printing from Windows 73
Help menu 196
Hibernate mode
using 198
hiding icons on the home
screen 21
holding faxes 108
hole punch 82
hole punch box
emptying 208
home screen
customizing 21
hiding icons 21
showing icons 21
home screen applications
configuring 22
finding information 22
home screen buttons and icons
description 16
HTML menu 195
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 21
showing 21
Image menu 196
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 273
indicator light 15
individual settings information
erasing 202
initial fax setup 90
using the Embedded Web
Server 90
Insert hole punch box 274
Insert Tray [x] 274
inserting a header or footer
copying 81
installing a memory card 30
installing an optional card 31
installing hardware options
order of installation 38
installing printer 45
installing the optional trays 38
Insucient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 274
Insucient memory to collate job
[37] 274
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 274
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 274
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 274
Insucient space between paper
stacks in Tray 3 274
Index 358
internal options 27
internal options, adding
print driver 45
internal print server
troubleshooting 289
Internal Solutions Port
troubleshooting 289
Internal Solutions Port (ISP)
installing 32
IP address of computer
finding 20
IP address, printer
finding 20
IPv6 menu 132
J
jams
avoiding 241
locating jam areas 242
locations 242
numbers 242
jams, clearing
in 3000‑sheet tray 251
in door C 251
in door F 251
in multipurpose feeder 244
in top ADF door 268
Job Accounting menu 189
L
labels, paper
tips 59
letterhead
copying on 77
loading, multipurpose
feeder 59
loading, trays 59
line filter 95
LINE port 44
linking trays 56, 57
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 275
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 275
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 275
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 275
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 275
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 276
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[paper size] [paper
orientation] 276
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[paper type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 276
Load staples 276
Load staples [G11, G12] 277
loading letterhead
paper orientation 59
loading the multipurpose
feeder 53
loading trays 51
lock, security 201
M
maintenance counter,
resetting 233
making copies using paper from
selected tray 78
memory
types installed on printer 201
memory card 27
installing 30
Memory full [38] 277
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 277
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 277
menu settings
loading on multiple
printers 239
menu settings page
printing 50
menus
Active NIC 128
AppleTalk 133
Bin Setup 125
Confidential Print 143
Configure MP 120
Copy Settings 157
Custom Bin Names 124
Custom Names 124
Custom Scan Sizes 124
Custom Types 124
Default Source 117
diagram of 116
Edit Security Setups 141
Erase Temporary Data Files 144
E‑mail Settings 170
Fax Mode (Analog Fax
Setup) 162
Finishing 186
Flash Drive 179
FTP Settings 175
General Settings 148
Help 196
HTML 195
Image 196
IPv6 132
Job Accounting 189
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 142
Network [x] 128
Network Card 130
Network Reports 130
Paper Loading 122
Paper Size/Type 117
Paper Texture 121
Parallel [x] 135
PCL Emul 192
PDF 191
PostScript 192
Quality 188
Reports 127
Security Audit Log 144
Serial [x] 137
Set Date and Time 146
Setup 184
SMTP Setup 140
Standard Network 128
Standard USB 134
Substitute Size 121
TCP/IP 130
Universal Setup 125
Utilities 190
Wireless 132
XPS 191
menus diagram 116
message
e‑mail options 87
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 142
mobile device
printing from 73
moving the printer 10, 236
Multi Send
adding a profile 24
Index 359
setting up 24
multipurpose feeder
loading 53
MyShortcut
about 24
N
Network [x] menu 128
Network [x] software error
[54] 277
Network Card menu 130
Network Reports menu 130
network setup page
printing 50
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 277
noise emission levels 338
non‑volatile memory 201
erasing 202
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 278
notices 337, 338, 341, 342, 343,
344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 350
number of remaining pages
estimate 209
O
Open door H and remove paper
from beneath area H10 278
optional 2 x 500‑sheet tray
installing 38
optional 2500‑sheet tray
installing 38
optional card
installing 31
optional trays
installing 38
options
firmware cards 27
Internal Solutions Port (ISP) 32
memory card 27, 30
printer hard disk, removing 36
options, copy screen
copy from 81
scale 82
options, touch‑screen
copy 81
e‑mail 87, 88
fax 110
ordering
300K maintenance kit 211
photoconductor unit 210
staple cartridges 211
ordering supplies
toner cartridge 210
waste toner bottle 210
organizing cables 44
original size
e‑mail options 87
scan options 114
output file type
changing 86
scan image 114
ozone filter
replacing 224
P
page setup
e‑mail options 88
fax options 109
scan options 115
paper
characteristics 60
dierent sizes, copying 78
letterhead 61
preprinted forms 61
recycled 61
saving 80
selecting 61
storing 60, 63
unacceptable 61
using recycled 197
Paper changes needed 278
paper characteristics 60
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 292
paper jams
avoiding 241
paper jams, clearing
door C 244, 246
door D 249, 250
in 3000‑sheet tray 251
in bottom ADF door 268
in door C 251
in door F 251
in multipurpose feeder 244
Paper Loading menu 122
paper size
setting 51
Paper Size/Type menu 117
paper sizes
supported 63
Paper Texture menu 121
paper type
setting 51
paper types
supported by printer 66
paper weights
supported by printer 66
Parallel [x] menu 135
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 278
parts
checking status 209
checking, from printer control
panel 209
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 209
storing 211
using genuine Lexmark 210
parts, ordering
300K maintenance kit 211
PCL Emul menu 192
PDF menu 191
Personal Identification Number
method
using 48
phone splitter 96
Photoconductor low [84.xy] 278
photoconductor unit
ordering 210
replacing 212
Photoconductor very low
[84.xy] 278
photos
copying 76
placing separator sheets
between copies
copying 80
port settings
configuring 49
PostScript menu 192
power cord socket 44
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 46
print driver
hardware options, adding 45
print irregularities 307
print job
canceling from the
computer 75
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 204
replacing a photoconductor
unit 212
Index 360
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 305
characters have jagged
edges 300
clipped pages or images 300
gray background on prints 302
horizontal voids appear on
prints 302
print irregularities 307
print is too dark 308
print is too light 309
printer is printing solid black
pages 306
repeating defects appear on
prints 311
shadow images appear on
prints 312
skewed print 313
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 313
streaked vertical lines 314
toner fog or background
shading appears on prints 316
toner rubs o 316
toner specks appear on
prints 317
transparency print quality is
poor 317
uneven print density 318
white streaks 318
print quality, troubleshooting
cleaning the charger 205
cleaning the printhead
lens 205
print troubleshooting
envelope seals when
printing 294
error reading flash drive 294
held jobs do not print 293
incorrect characters print 295
incorrect margins on prints 303
jammed pages are not
reprinted 291
job prints from wrong tray 295
job prints on wrong paper 295
jobs do not print 298
Large jobs do not collate 296
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 296
paper curl 304
paper frequently jams 292
print job takes longer than
expected 297
tray linking does not work 299
unexpected page breaks
occur 299
printer 45
basic model 11
connecting to an outlet 10
fully configured 11
minimum clearances 10
moving 10, 236
selecting a location 10
shipping 237
printer configurations 11
printer control panel
adjusting brightness 199
indicator light 15
Sleep button light 15
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 278
printer hard disk
disposing of 201
encrypting 203
removing 36
printer hard disk encryption 203
printer hard disk memory
erasing 202
printer information
where to find 9
printer IP address
finding 20
printer is printing blank
pages 305
printer messages
[x] maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 277
[x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder. [200.xx] 244
[x]‑page jam, detach the
3000‑sheet tray and open
door F. [24y.xx] 251
[x]‑page jam, open door C and
clear all jammed media.
[2yy.xx] 244
[x]‑page jam, open door D and
clear all jammed media.
[24y.xx] 249
[x]‑page jam, open door H and
rotate knob H6 clockwise.
Leave paper in bin. [426.xx–
428.xx] 263
[x]‑page jam, open doors G, H,
and J and clear jammed paper.
Leave paper in bin. [400–
402] 254
[x]‑page jam, press latch at area
E to open ADF’s top cover.
[28y.xx] 268
[x]‑page jam, press latch to
access area G and clear
jammed staples. Leave paper
in bin. [402.93] 260
[x]‑page jam, press latch to
access area G. Leave paper in
bin. [40y.xx] 257
[x]‑page jam, slide the
3000‑sheet tray and open
door C. [2yy.xx] 246
[x]‑page jam, slide the
3000‑sheet tray and open
door D. [24y.xx] 250
Cartridge low [88.xy] 270
Cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 270
Cartridge very low [88.xy] 270
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to
[paper size] load
[orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to
[paper type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 271
Close door [x] 271
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 271
Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored
[57] 271
Defective flash detected
[51] 271
Disk full [62] 272
Disk full, scan job canceled 272
Disk must be formatted for use
in this device 272
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 272
Empty the hole punch box 272
Index 361
Error reading USB drive.
Remove USB. 272
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 272
Fax memory full 273
Fax partition inoperative.
Contact system
administrator. 273
Fax server 'To Format' not set
up. Contact system
administrator. 273
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 273
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 273
Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] [34] 273
Insert hole punch box 274
Insert Tray [x] 274
Insucient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 274
Insucient memory to collate
job [37] 274
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature
[35] 274
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 274
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 274
Insucient space between
paper stacks in Tray 3 274
Load [paper source] with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 275
Load [paper source] with
[custom type name [paper
orientation] 275
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 275
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 275
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 275
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 276
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[paper size] [paper
orientation] 276
Load Multipurpose Feeder with
[paper type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 276
Load staples 276
Load staples [G11, G12] 277
Memory full [38] 277
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 277
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 277
Network [x] software error
[54] 277
No analog phone line
connected to modem, fax is
disabled. 277
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources
[52] 278
Open door H and remove paper
from beneath area H10 278
Paper changes needed 278
Parallel port [x] disabled
[56] 278
Photoconductor low [84.xy] 278
Photoconductor very low
[84.xy] 278
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 278
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive cartridge
[31.xy] 279
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive photoconductor
[31.xy] 279
Remove defective disk [61] 279
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 279
Remove packaging material,
open door C, remove metal
clips, remove all screws from
scanner carriage 279
Remove paper from [linked set
bin name] 280
Remove paper from all
bins 279
Remove paper from bin [x] 279
Remove paper from standard
output bin 280
Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 281
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 280
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 280
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 280
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 281
Replace missing cartridge
[31.xy] 281
Replace missing
photoconductor [31.xy] 281
Replace missing waste toner
bottle [82.xy] 281
Replace paper pick rollers in
[paper source], use parts and
instructions in tray 1 or tray 2
compartment [80] 282
Replace photoconductor, 0
pages remain [84.xy] 282
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 282
Replace unsupported
photoconductor [32.xy] 282
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 282
Restore held jobs? 282
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 282
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if
problem persists.
[840.02] 283
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 283
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 283
Scanner maintenance required,
use ADF Kit [80] 283
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 283
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 283
Some held jobs were not
restored 283
Standard network software
error [54] 284
Index 362
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 284
Supply needed to complete
job 284
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 284
Too many flash options installed
[58] 284
Too many trays attached
[58] 284
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 285
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 285
Unsupported disk 285
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 285
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 272
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 285
Weblink server not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 285
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 288
internal print server 289
Internal Solutions Port 289
tray problems 290
USB/parallel interface card 291
printer problems, solving
basic 286
printer security
information on 203
printhead lens
cleaning 205
printing
canceling, from the printer
control panel 75
directory list 74
font sample list 74
forms 70
from a computer 70
from a mobile device 73
from flash drive 71
menu settings page 50
network setup page 50
printing a directory list 74
printing a font sample list 74
printing a menu settings
page 50
printing a network setup
page 50
printing forms 70
printing from a flash drive 71
printing from a mobile device 73
printing held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 73
from Windows 73
publications
where to find 9
Push Button Configuration
method
using 48
Q
Quality menu 188
R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 86
recycled paper
using 61, 197
recycling
Lexmark packaging 200
Lexmark products 199
toner cartridges 200
reducing a copy 79
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 279
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
photoconductor [31.xy] 279
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 25
Remove defective disk [61] 279
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 279
Remove packaging material,
open door C, remove metal clips,
remove all screws from scanner
carriage 279
Remove paper from [linked set
bin name] 280
Remove paper from all bins 279
Remove paper from bin [x] 279
Remove paper from standard
output bin 280
removing printer hard disk 36
repeat print jobs 73
printing from a Macintosh
computer 73
printing from Windows 73
repeating defects appear on
prints 311
Replace [x] maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 281
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 280
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 280
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 280
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 281
Replace missing cartridge
[31.xy] 281
Replace missing photoconductor
[31.xy] 281
Replace missing waste toner
bottle [82.xy] 281
Replace paper pick rollers in
[paper source], use parts and
instructions in tray 1 or tray 2
compartment [80] 282
Replace photoconductor, 0
pages remain [84.xy] 282
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 282
Replace unsupported
photoconductor [32.xy] 282
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 282
replacing parts
pick, feed, separator
rollers 226
transfer module 229
transfer roller 232
replacing supplies
staple cartridge in booklet
finisher 217
staple cartridge in staple
finisher 214
staple cartridge in staple, hole
punch finisher 219
toner cartridge 220
waste toner bottle 222
replacing the ADF scan pad 234
replacing the exhaust filter 224
replacing the ozone filter 224
Index 363
replacing the pick, feed, and
separator rollers 226
replacing the staple cartridge in
the booklet finisher 217
replacing the staple cartridge in
the staple finisher 214
replacing the staple cartridge in
the staple, hole punch
finisher 219
replacing the toner
cartridge 220
replacing the transfer
module 229
replacing the transfer roller 232
replacing the waste toner
bottle 222
reports
viewing 238
Reports menu 127
reserve print jobs 73
printing from a Macintosh
computer 73
printing from Windows 73
resetting the maintenance
counter 233
resolution
e‑mail options 87
fax options 109
scan options 114
resolution, fax
changing 106
Restore held jobs? 282
restoring factory default
settings 240
RJ11 adapter 99
rollers
replacing 226
S
safety information 7, 8
Save As Shortcut
copy options 82
e‑mail options 87
scan options 114
saving paper 80
scan image
output file type 114
scan options
darkness 114
file name 114
original size 114
page setup 115
resolution 114
Save As Shortcut 114
Scan Preview 115
Send As 114
Scan Preview
scan options 115
scan preview
fax options 110
scan screen
content source 114
content type 114
Scan to Computer
setting up 113
Scan to Network
setting up 25
using 111
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a
computer 329
partial document or photo
scans 329
scan job was not
successful 330
scanner unit does not close 331
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 331
scanner
functions 13
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 282
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02] 283
scanner glass
cleaning 204
using 14
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 283
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 283
Scanner maintenance required,
use ADF Kit [80] 283
scanning
to an FTP address 112
scanning to a computer 113
scanning to a flash drive 113
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 111
using the control panel 112
scanning to network
destinations 111
security
modifying confidential print
settings 74
Security Audit Log menu 144
security lock 201
security settings information
erasing 202
security Web page
printer security information 203
selecting a location for the
printer 10
selecting paper 61
Send As
e‑mail options 87
scan options 114
sending a fax
using the computer 104
using the control panel 104
sending an e‑mail using the
control panel 85
sending fax at a scheduled
time 105
Serial [x] menu 137
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 283
serial printing
setting up 50
Set Date and Time menu 146
setting
paper size 51
paper type 51
TCP/IP address 130
setting the fax number 103
setting the outgoing fax
name 103
setting the Universal paper
size 51
setting up e‑mail alerts 238
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 99
digital telephone service 98
DSL connection 95
standard telephone line
connection 90
VoIP connection 96
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 326
setting up serial printing 50
Setup menu 184
shipping the printer 237
Index 364
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 77
e‑mail 85
fax destination 105, 106
FTP address 112
FTP destination 111
showing icons on the home
screen 21
sides (duplex)
copy options 82
Sleep Mode
adjusting 199
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 283
SMTP Setup menu 140
Some held jobs were not
restored 283
stabilizing feet 38
Standard Network menu 128
Standard network software error
54] 284
Standard USB menu 134
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 284
staple 82
staple cartridge in booklet
finisher
replacing 217
staple cartridge in staple finisher
replacing 214
staple cartridge in staple, hole
punch finisher
replacing 219
staple cartridges
ordering 211
statement of volatility 201
status of parts
checking 209
status of supplies
checking 209
storing
paper 63
parts 211
supplies 211
storing print jobs 73
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 313
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 314
streaks appear 318
Substitute Size menu 121
supplies
checking status 209
checking, from printer control
panel 209
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 209
conserving 197
storing 211
using genuine Lexmark 210
using recycled paper 197
supplies, ordering
photoconductor unit 210
staple cartridges 211
toner cartridge 210
waste toner bottle 210
Supply needed to complete
job 284
supply notifications
configuring 239
supported flash drives 72
supported paper sizes 63
finisher 67
supported paper types 66
finisher 67
supported paper weights 66
finisher 67
T
TCP/IP menu 130
telecommunication
notices 345, 346, 347
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 284
the scanner does not
respond 332
tips
card stock 58
labels, paper 59
on using envelopes 58
transparencies 60
tips on using envelopes 58
tips on using letterhead 59
toner cartridge
ordering 210
replacing 220
toner cartridges
recycling 200
toner darkness
adjusting 70
Too many flash options installed
[58] 284
Too many trays attached
[58] 284
touch screen
buttons 18
transfer module
replacing 229
transfer roller
replacing 232
transparencies
copying on 77
tips 60
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 285
trays
linking 56, 57
loading 51
unlinking 56, 57
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 333
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 333
checking an unresponsive
printer 286
contacting customer
support 334
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 326
solving basic printer
problems 286
the scanner does not
respond 332
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 319
partial document or photo
copies 320
poor copy quality 320
poor scanned image
quality 329
scanner unit does not close 331
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 288
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 322
can receive but not send
faxes 325
can send but not receive
faxes 326
cannot send or receive a
fax 323
Index 365
received fax has poor print
quality 327
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 292
troubleshooting, print
envelope seals when
printing 294
error reading flash drive 294
held jobs do not print 293
incorrect characters print 295
incorrect margins on prints 303
jammed pages are not
reprinted 291
job prints from wrong tray 295
job prints on wrong paper 295
jobs do not print 298
Large jobs do not collate 296
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 296
paper curl 304
paper frequently jams 292
print job takes longer than
expected 297
tray linking does not work 299
unexpected page breaks
occur 299
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 305
characters have jagged
edges 300
clipped pages or images 300
gray background on prints 302
horizontal voids appear on
prints 302
print irregularities 307
print is too dark 308
print is too light 309
printer is printing solid black
pages 306
repeating defects appear on
prints 311
shadow images appear on
prints 312
skewed print 313
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 313
streaked vertical lines 314
toner fog or background
shading appears on prints 316
toner rubs o 316
toner specks appear on
prints 317
transparency print quality is
poor 317
uneven print density 318
white streaks on a page 318
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 288
internal print server 289
Internal Solutions Port 289
tray problems 290
USB/parallel interface card 291
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a
computer 329
partial document or photo
scans 329
scan job was not
successful 330
scanner unit does not close 331
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 331
two‑sided copying 79
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 16
uneven print density 318
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 285
Universal paper size
setting 51
Universal Setup menu 125
unlinking trays 56, 57
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 285
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 272
USB port 44
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 291
using Forms and Favorites 70
using Hibernate mode 198
using recycled paper 197
using the address book
e‑mailing 86
using the ADF
copying 76
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 14
using the scanner glass 14
copying 76
using the touch‑screen
buttons 18
Utilities menu 190
V
verify print jobs 73
printing from a Macintosh
computer 73
printing from Windows 73
vertical voids appear 318
viewing
reports 238
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 238
voice mail
setting up 90
voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP)
fax setup 96
voids appear 318
VoIP adapter 96
volatile memory 201
erasing 202
volatility
statement of 201
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 210
replacing 222
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 285
Weblink server not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 285
Wireless menu 132
wireless network
configuration information 46
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 49
wireless setup wizard
using 47
X
XPS menu 191
Index 366